Suchergebnisse

El Ecuador, como país intercultural y plurinacional recoge en su memoria social todas las costumbres, mitos, leyendas y tradiciones que transforman en direccionamientos para el desarrollo del país en todas sus áreas, ya que compila en el Derecho Consuetudinario de los pueblos originarios del Ecuador su forma de actuar, ya hoy en día gracias a la revolución ciudadana, lo podemos socializar y aplicar, mismos que deben ser cumplidos en forma coercitiva porque ese es su modo de vida, que con toda seguridad lo manifiesto, es la base para llegar al Sumak Kausay. El presente trabajo explica en resumen la historia de nuestros pueblos originarios, mismos que para llegar a la vida republicana y la colonización han sufrido un proceso de expansionismo y dominación incaica – española, en su debido orden, para luego entrar en la capitulación por las grandes empresas de conquistas, organizadas técnicamente en Centro América y expandirse hacia América del Sur e ingresar al proceso de formación del amerindio, que en el tránsito de Inca a indio y campesino, ha sufrido discriminaciones en todo sentido, llegando a ocultar toda la sabiduría ancestral que luego fue catalogado como actividades paganas en contra de Dios de acuerdo a la Biblia que nos trajeron del viejo mundo (Vera, 1989) En este proceso, el amerindio pasa por un período de tamizaje en donde se cumplió con el gran objetivo de la conquista; que desaparezca de una vez por todas los rasgos culturales de la cosmología andina, que el runa y la huarmi tengan vergüenza de sus ancestros, sus etnias y culturas; de este modo, terminaron con su vestimenta, culto, creencias, mitos, leyendas y tradiciones (Derecho Consuetudinario). Conscientes estamos que toda la memoria ancestral se resume en el Derecho Consuetudinario de los pueblos originarios del Ecuador, pero no se puede desarrollar, preservar y socializar sino existe un proceso de enseñanza básica para que sea transmitida de generación en generación, caso contrario, toda esa riqueza cultural quedaría en el olvido. Razón por la cual los maestros cumplen un papel importante en el proceso de enseñanza aprendizaje, ya que son los responsables del conocimiento histórico real del antes y el después de las comunidades y pueblos del Ecuador. Para que un docente pueda transmitir los conocimientos ancestrales inéditos a las futuras generaciones, debe dominar la norma y la sociología jurídica ya que nos da la sabiduría y todas las herramientas para hacerlo con eficiencia, efectividad, y eficacia de todos los conocimientos ancestrales en prácticas diarias; es así como, en la vida republicana, hasta la década de los 90 los educadores no podían realizar prácticas educativas reales en forma clara, transparente y cierta, porque los contenidos científicos se basaban sólo en conocimientos extranjeros o currículos de otros países y en el mejor de los casos al catecismo. Es la Sociología Jurídica, la filosofía y el Derecho Consuetudinario especialmente la danza el teatro y los juegos populares las únicas actividades que de una u otra manera utilizan legalmente los educadores para realizar el proceso de enseñanza aprendizaje con saberes ancestrales plasmados en mensajes a través de corografías, obras teatrales y juegos lúdicos o populares. Tanto en el Ecuador como en el resto de América Latina, existe un nuevo escenario político en la cual la: multi-pluri-inter-culturalidad está ganando espacio y legitimidad. Esta nueva coyuntura incluye el reconocimiento por parte de los estados sobre la diversidad étnica y cultural, así también la necesidad de reconocer derechos específicos, colectivos y de la naturaleza, lo que algunos autores llaman el nuevo "constitucionalismo multicultural", que está enfocado en una nueva forma de solución de conflictos, ya sea por la conciliación, mediación, arbitraje, pero principalmente la justicia indígena (Van, 2000) y su relación con la ciudadanía "étnica" "cultural". (Montoya, 2002). Ratifican la aplicación de los Métodos Alternativos y Solución de Conflictos (MASC) mismos que están amparados por la Constitución ecuatoriana en su Artículo 190. Como bien sabemos, a diferencia de otros países de la región, en el Ecuador este reconocimiento oficial es de mayor jerarquía; reflejo y resultado de luchas y demandas del movimiento indígena, de sus procesos de fortalecimiento identitario como actores sociales, políticos y culturales y de su cuestionamiento de los modelos existentes de ciudadanía, democracia, estado y nación liderados por los movimientos indígenas en sus diversas organizaciones de la costa, sierra y oriente. Las demandas de reconocimiento cultural de los pueblos indígenas y pueblos originarios del Ecuador, han puesto en duda la vigencia de un sistema jurídico mono cultural, aun teniendo en cuenta el escenario del multiculturalismo constitucional que recorrió las reformas constitucionales latinoamericanas desde la aprobación del Convenio No. 169 por parte de la Organización Internacional de Trabajo en 1989. En el Ecuador este proceso es primordial y de sumo interés, razón por la cual con la aprobación del referéndum de la nueva Constitución en el 2008, en la que se define como Estado Plurinacional de Derechos, reconociendo la coexistencia de una diversidad de sistemas jurídicos. Los países de la región, como Bolivia y Venezuela, entre otros, han transitado procesos similares, cuestionando la permanencia del denominado monismo jurídico quien plantea que las crisis son una precondición para el surgimiento de nuevas teorías y referentes para la solución de conflictos. El reconocimiento por parte del Estado de los sistemas jurídicos, no implica que las autoridades de los pueblos y nacionalidades indígenas tengan el objetivo de crear algo nuevo, sino el reconocimiento de una realidad histórica de ejercicio de derechos consuetudinarios, que en el marco de la construcción colonial de la dominación estatal fueron invisibilizados, negados y perseguidos, como prácticas al margen de la ley. El pluralismo jurídico no es una "alternativa" del derecho, sino un proceso de construcción de otras formas jurídicas que identifiquen al derecho con los sectores mayoritarios de la sociedad, y de respuestas institucionales a procesos de transición de una sociedad marcada por la colonialidad hacia una construcción social y estatal de carácter intercultural y plurinacional, en donde se compila todas las costumbres, tradiciones, leyendas y mitos ancestrales. Tal como lo plantea (Coutinho, 1990), "un pluralismo de sujetos colectivos fundado en un nuevo desafío: construir una nueva hegemonía que contemple el equilibrio entre el predominio de la voluntad general, sin negar el pluralismo de los intereses particulares". En los últimos cuatro años de vigencia de la nueva carta magna del Ecuador, la coexistencia de la justicia ordinaria y la justicia indígena no ha estado exenta de conflictos respecto de los alcances de la jurisdicción de la administración y justicia indígena, de la adaptación de procesos a los derechos humanos, de los mecanismos de coordinación entre autoridades estatales y autoridades indígenas, entre otros. En ciertos casos se alcanzan situaciones en las que las autoridades comunitarias fueran sometidas a la justicia ordinaria por exceder su jurisdicción (Ref. Caso La Cocha), así como fuertes reclamos por parte de las autoridades comunitarias respecto de la intervención no solicitada de operadores de justicia al margen de sus derechos colectivos. Razón por la cual sociólogos, filósofos e investigadores para dar jerarquía a toda la memoria, filosofía ancestral y la cosmovisión andina, enfocan como Derecho Consuetudinario para llegar al cumplimiento de la armonía comunitaria. ; Ecuador, as an intercultural and multinational country in its social memory, collects all customs, myths, legends and traditions that become the country's means for development in all areas, as compiled in the customary law of the indigenous peoples of Ecuador that nowadays, thanks to the citizen's revolution we can socialize and apply, these should executed as an imperative because that is their way of life, which I can surely say, is the foundation to achieve the Smac Kausay. In this paper we explain in brief the history of our people, whom to reach the republican status and colonization have undergone a process of expansionism and Inca- Spanish domination, thereafter entering the capitulation by the big companies conquests, technically organized in Central America to expand into South America and enter the process of formation of the Amerindian going from Inca to Indian and peasant, has suffered discrimination in every way; thus hiding all ancient wisdom since it was listed as pagan activities against God and the Bible that were brought from the old continent. In this process the Amerindian goes through a period of screening where he meets the great object of conquest, disappearing once and for all the cultural traits of the Andean cosmology, the run and huarmi are ashamed of their ancestors, their ethnicities and cultures; in this way the screening process finished with their costume, religion, beliefs, myths, legends and traditions. It is known that all the ancestral memory is summed up in the customary law of the indigenous peoples of Ecuador, however, it is not possible for it to develop, preserve and socialize, unless through a process of basic education to be transmitted from generation to generation; otherwise, all this cultural richness would be forgotten. This is why teachers play an important role in the teaching-learning process since they are responsible for the actual historical knowledge before and after the communities and people of Ecuador. For a teacher to transmit to future generations unpublished ancestral knowledge, you must 22 master the art, as only art gives us the wisdom and all the tools to do it with efficiency, effectiveness, and expertise of all ancient knowledge in daily practices; the reason being is that during the republican period until the 90s, educators could not make real educational practices in clear, transparent and authentic ways, because scientific contents are based only on foreign expertise or curricula of other countries. Performing arts are especially theater and dance popular games the only activities that one way or another legally used educators for the teaching-learning process with ancestral knowledge embodied in messages through choreographies, plays and recreational or popular games. Both in Ecuador and in the rest of Latin America, there is a new political scenario in which the multi- -inter-culture is gaining ground and legitimacy. This new bias includes the States recognition over ethnic and cultural diversity, and also the need to recognize personal and common rights, as well as those of nature, for which some authors call the new "multicultural constitutionalism." Van Cott (2000) and its relation to the cultural ethnicity. Montoya (2002). In relation to what is the Alternative Dispute Resolution mean (ADR) which are covered by the Constitution in Article 190. As we know, unlike other countries in the region, in Ecuador this official recognition is of major prominence; reflection and result of struggles and demands of the indigenous movement in the processes of strengthening identity and social, political and cultural actors and their questioning of existing models of citizenship; democracy, state and nation led by indigenous movements in their various organizations through the coast, mountains and east. The demand for cultural recognition of indigenous peoples and indigenous people of Ecuador have questioned the validity of a mono cultural legal system, even taking into account the stage of the constitutional multiculturalism that swept Latin American constitutional reforms since the adoption of Convention No. 169 by the International Labor Organization in 1989. In Ecuador this process is essential and of great interest, thus with the approval of the referendum on the new Constitution in 2008, which is defined as multinational State of Rights, recognizing the coexistence of a variety of legal systems in it. The countries of the region such as Bolivia, Venezuela and others, have passed similar processes, questioning the permanence of the so-called legal monism who argues that crises are a precondition for the emergence of new theories and relating to conflict resolution. The recognition by the State of legal systems does not imply that the authorities of the indigenous people and nationalities have the goal of creating something new, but the recognition of a historical reality exercise of customary rights, which under the colonial domination were invisible, denied and persecuted, and practices outside the law. We do not consider the legal pluralism as an "alternative" use of law but as a process of construction of other legal forms identifying the law with the majority sectors of society and institutional responses to processes of transition from a society marked by colonialism moving towards a social state characterized as intercultural and multinational where all the customs, traditions, legends and ancient myths are compiled. As stated by Coutinho (1990), "a pluralism of collective subjects based on a new challenge: to build a new hegemony that considers the balance between the dominance of the general will, without denying the pluralism of individual interests". In the last 4 years of validity of the new Constitution of Ecuador, the coexistence of ordinary justice and indigenous justice, has not been free of conflict over the scope of the jurisdiction of the administration and indigenous justice, the adaptation of cases to human rights, the mechanisms of coordination between state authorities and indigenous leaders, among others. Reaching in some cases, situations where the Community authorities were subjected to regular courts to "exceed" its jurisdiction (Ref. Case La Cocha) and strong complaints from the Community authorities regarding the unsolicited intervention of justice operators regardless of their collective rights. 24 In this research all cultural features of the main communities and indigenous nationalities of the three regions of Ecuador are also being analyzed, which have gone unnoticed in the social context and in the best case, taken as isolated activities, put in practice or socialized in the main festivities of the people. This is the reason for us as educators for basic education, to give all the memory hierarchy, ancient philosophy and the Andean world we take it as customary law to take into action with the community may it be as a voluntary act or coercively. Part of the study of this paper is also to extent the responsibility to the State-Government, to maintain all the values and principles of the ancestral memory and cultural heritage of the indigenous people of Ecuador in an intact and unchanged way, to transmit to future generations; goal which you can achieve only with the education and training of teachers in different areas, but mainly in performing arts ; as well, on how to handle: customs, traditions, ethnic and folk legends, which is part of the standard of living of the indigenous people and peasants, and serves as a relevant issue to the development of basic education curriculum. This research with proposed development schedule was fulfilling the objectives, analyzing the extent to which cultures of indigenous people of Ecuador are present in the teaching of basic education, teacher training, and the level of positioning in the absence the arts, the presence of popular traditions in the curriculum and teacher preparation for teaching and its impact on society, and only then get to know the cultures of indigenous people of Ecuador in basic education. A study on the contribution of arts and popular traditions in the curriculum of basic education to achieve the implementation of the common system of legal pluralism with coarse principles based on Andean philosophy. The methodology, as an instrument for the operationalization of variables and objectives of the research is based on the paradigm of functionalism and constructivism, with field research (indigenous community leaders, members of councils, cultural promoters, educational authorities, elders of the different communities , basic education teachers) as descriptive, bibliographic and documentary scientific contributions in the areas of study, collecting data with the technique of the survey, interview and observation, and tools such as questionnaire. Interview guide and observation sheets, which allowed establishing the relationships between variables and approving the alternative hypothesis. Thus affirm that in our country, knowledge of the cultures of the indigenous people of Ecuador have not been involved, but rather have been marginalized and forgotten, where only basic education devoted to teaching general knowledge and specified in the area of mathematics and language, which is why there is a lack of 80% of the current population, and especially of teachers, both Ecuadorian reality as ethnicities and cultures of our ancestors.

e.roszkowska@uwb.edu.pl ; Adamus-Matuszyńska A., Współczesne teorie konfliktu społecznego, AE w Katowicach, Katowice 1998. ; Aumann R. J., Hart S. (eds.), Handbook of game theory with economic applications, Tom I, II, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1994. ; Albrecht K., Albrecht S., Added Value Negotiating. The Breakthrough Method for Building Balanced Deals, Business One, Irwin, Homewood, III, 1993. ; Baran K. W., Zbiorowe prawo pracy, Universitas, Kraków 2002. ; Bargiel-Matusiewicz K., Negocjacje i mediacje, PWE, Warszawa 2007. ; Baron D. P., Ferejohn J. A., Legislatures, American Political Science Review, 1989. ; Bartos O. J., Process and Outcome of Negotiation, Columbia University Press, New York 1974. ; Bartos O. J. , Simple Model of Negotiation, [in:] I. W. Zartman (ed.), Negotiation Process: Theories and Applications, Sage, Beverly HillsCA 1978. ; Bazerman M. H., Neale M. A., Negocjując racjonalne, Polskie Towarzystwo Psychologiczne, Olsztyn 1997. ; Bednarek A., Kraszewska H., Budowanie zgody. Mediacje jako sposób zapanowania nad konfliktem", Personel, 23(92), 2000. ; Bell D., Raiffa H., Tversky A., Decision Making. Descriptive, Normative and Prescriptive Interactions, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge 1988. ; Kulpa A., Dwa oblicza konfliktu. Funkcjonalna teoria konfliktu Lewisa A. Cosera a współczesne koncepcje zarządzania konfliktami, Organizacja i Kierowanie, Nr 1(107), 2002. ; Lax D. L., Sebenius J. K., Negocjacje w trzech wymiarach. Jak wygrać najważniejsze gry negocjacyjne, MT Biznes, Warszawa 2007. ; Lemmerman H., Komunikacja werbalna. Szkoła dyskutowania, Wydawnictwo Astrum, Wrocław 1994. ; Lendzion J.P., Stankiewicz-Mróz. A., Wprowadzenie do organizacji i zarządzania, Oficyna Ekonomiczna, Kraków 2005. ; Lewicka-Strzałecka A., Etyka biznesu jako dyscyplina naukowa, [w:] J. Dietl, W. Gasparski (red.), Etyka biznesu, PWN, Warszawa 2000. ; Lewicki R. J., Robinson R. J., Ethical and unethical bargaining tactics: An empirical study, "Journal of Business Ethics", 17(6), 1998. ; Lewicki R.J., Weiss S.E., Lewin D., Models of conflict, negotiation and third party intervention: A review and synthesis, ,,Journal of Organizational Behaviour", Vol. 13, 1992. ; Lissowski G. (red.), Elementy teorii wyboru społecznego, Wydawnictwo Naukowe Scholar, Warszawa 2001. ; Luce R., Raiffa H. , Games and Decisions. Introduction and Critical Survey, Jon Wiley, New York 1958; polskie wydanie: Gry i decyzje, PWN, Warszawa 1964. ; Luecke R., Negocjacje. Sztuka zawierania dobrych kontaktów, Harward Business Essentials, Warszawa 2008. ; Binmore K., Fun and Games. A text on Game theory, D.C. Heath and Company Lexington 1992. ; Malawski M., Wieczorek A. , Sosnowska H., Konkurencja i kooperacja. Teoria gier w ekonomii i naukach społecznych, Wydawnictwo Naukowe PWN, Warszawa 1997. ; March G., Simon A., Teoria organizacji, PWN, Warszawa 1964. ; Masewicz W., Rokowania oraz spory zbiorowe pracy, Biblioteczka Pracownicza, Warszawa 1993. ; Mastenbroek W., Negocjowanie, PWN, Warszawa 1997. ; Mayer B., The dynamics of conflict resolution. A practitioner's guide, Jossey-Brass, A Wiley Company, San Francisco 2000. ; Mc Clintock C., Game Behavior and Social Motivation in Interpersonal Settings, [in:] Experimental Social Psychology, Holt, Rinehart, & Winston, New York. ; Mc Gregor D. F., The Human Side of Enterprise, McGraw-Hill, New York 1985. ; Mesjasz C., Mediacje w konflikcie, ,,Przegląd Organizacji", 9(92). ; Mesjasz C., Założenia analizy negocjacji, ,,Organizacja i Kierowanie", nr 3(85), 1996. ; Mesjasz C., Determinanty i modele procesów negocjacji kredytowych pomiędzy bankiem a przedsiębiorstwem, Wydawnictwo Akademii Ekonomicznej w Krakowie, Kraków 2000. ; Binmore K., Osborne M. J., Rubinstein A., Noncooperative models of bargaining, [in:] Aumann R. J., Hart S. (eds.), Handbook of game theory with economic applications, Tom I, Elsevier 1994. ; Mikuła G., Wenzel M., Justice and Social Conflict, ,,International Journal of Psychology", 35(2), 2000. ; Modzelewski W., Wprowadzenie do socjologii, "Śląsk" Wydawnictwo Naukowe, Katowice 1999. ; Moore Ch. W., The Mediation Process. Practical Strategies for Resolving Conflict, Jossey-Bass Publishers, San Francisco, Londyn 1986. ; Morrow J. D., Game Theory for Political Scientists, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1994. ; Mucha J., Konflikt i społeczeństwo, PWN, Warszawa 1978. ; Mulholan J., The Language of Negotiation: A Handbook of Practical Strategies for Improving Communication, Routledge, London 1991. ; Murnighan J. K., Bargaining games. A new approach to strategic thinking in negotiations, William Morrow and Company, Inc. New York 1992. ; Myerson R. B., Game theory. Analysis of conflict, Harvard University Press, Harvard 1991. ; Myśliwiec G ., Techniki i triki negocjacyjne, EFEKT, Warszawa 1999. ; Nahotko S., Negocjacje biznesowe w zarządzaniu przedsiębiorstwem. Aspekt ekonomiczny, Biblioteka Menadżera Służby Pracowniczej, Zeszyt 192, OPO, Bydgoszcz 2001. ; Birkenbihl V., Komunikacja werbalna. Psychologia prowadzenia negocjacji, Astrum, Wrocław 1997. ; Najowska M., Problemy badania wpływu kapitału ludzkiego na zachowanie przedsiębiorcze, [w:] M. Juchnowicz (red.), Kapitał ludzki a kształtowanie przedsiębiorczości, Poltext, Warszawa 2004. ; Nierenberg G.I., Sztuka negocjacji, Studio Emka, Warszawa 1997. ; Nash J., Equilibrium Points in n-Person Games, "Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (US)", No. 36, 1950. ; Nash J., Non-cooperative games, "Annals of Mathematics", Vol. 54, 1951. ; Nash J., The bargaining problem, "Econometrica" , No. 18, 1950. ; Nash J., Two–Persons Cooperative Games, "Econometrica", No. 21, 1953. ; Nęcki Z., Negocjacje w biznesie, Profesjonalna Szkoła Biznesu, Kraków 1991. ; Nęcki Z., Komunikacja międzyludzka, Wydawnictwo Aktywa, Kraków 2000. ; Nierenberg G. I., Sztuka negocjacji jako metoda osiągania celu, Wydawnictwo Studio Emka, Warszawa 1994. ; Nogalski B., Jarocki P., Komunikacja niewerbalna w negocjacjach międzynarodowych, TNOiK, Bydgoszcz 1998. ; Blake R., Molton J., The management by grid principles or intuitionalism: Which?, "Group and Organization Studies", No. 6, 1981. ; Obłój K., Mikroszkółka zarządzania, PWE, Warszawa 1994. ; Ordeshook P.C., Game Theory and Political Theory, Cambridge University, Cambridge 1986. ; Osborne M.J., Rubinstein A., Bargaining and Markets, Academic Press, Inc, San Diego, CA 1990. ; Owen G., Teoria gier, PWN, Warszawa 1975. ; Pawlak Z., Systemy informatyczne, PWN, Warszawa 1983. ; Parsons T., The social systems, Routledge, London 1951. ; Perrotin R., Heusschen P., Kupić z zyskiem. Negocjacje handlowe, Poltext, Warszawa 1994. ; Pietras C., Decydowanie polityczne, PWN, Warszawa 1998. ; Pietrzak M. (red.), Metody i techniki menadżerskie, Wydawnictwo SGGW, Warszawa 2007. ; Pruitt D. G., Negotiator Behaviour, Academic Press, Orlando, Fla. 1981. ; Borkowska S., Negocjacje zbiorowe, PWE, Warszawa 1997. ; Putman L. L., Roloff M.E. (eds.), Communication and Negotiation, Sage, Newbury Park 1992. ; Pruitt D. G., Carnevale P. J., Negotiation in social conflict, Open University Press, Buckingham 1993. ; Pszczółkowski T., Umiejętność przekonywania i dyskusji, Warszawa 1995. ; Rahim M. A., A measures of styles of Handling Interpersonal Conflict, ,,Academy of Management Journal", 26(2), 1983. ; Rahim M. A., Toward a theory of managing organizational conflict, ,,The International Journal of Conflict Management", Vol. 13, No. 3, 2002. ; Raiffa H. , The Art and the Science of Negotiation, Harvard University Press, Harvard 1982. ; Rapoport A., Guyer M.,Gordon D., The 2x2 Games, Ann Arbor, 1976. ; Reiter R., A logic for default reasoning, Artificial Intelligence, No. 13, 1980. ; Robbins S. P., Zachowania w organizacji, PWE, Warszawa 1998. ; Roszkowska E., Etyka a negocjacje, [w:] Ekonomia. Polityka. Etyka, (red.) A. F. Bocian, Uniwersytet w Białymstoku, Białystok 2003. ; Borkowski J., Dyrda M., Kanarski L., Rokicki B., Wybrane problemy psychologii organizacji. O konflikcie i negocjacjach, Wyższa Szkoła Informatyki Stosowanej i Zarządzania, Warszawa 2000. ; Roszkowska E., Proces negocjacji w ujęciu teorii kompleksów reguł, "Optimum. Studia Ekonomiczne", nr 2(10), 2001. ; Roszkowska E., Modelowanie procesów decyzyjnych oraz negocjacji za pomocą kompleksów reguł, Wydawnictwo Uniwersytetu w Białymstoku, Białystok 2007. ; Roszkowska E., Style negocjacji-analiza zagadnienia, ,,Optimum. Studia Ekonomiczne", nr 4(20), 2003. ; Rubin J. Z., Brown B. R., The Social Psychology of Bargaining and Negotiation, Academic Press, Orlando, Fla. 1975. ; Rumel-Syska Z., Konflikty organizacyjne. Ujęcie mikrospołeczne, PWN, Warszawa 1990. ; Rusinowska A., Przetarg, [w:] Grupowe podejmowanie decyzji. Elementy teorii. Przykłady zastosowań, (red.) H. Sosnowska, Wydawnictwo Naukowe Scholar, Warszawa 1999. ; Rusinowska A., Zagadnienie przetargowe ze zmiennymi w czasie preferencjami graczy, "Roczniki Kolegium Analiz Ekonomicznych", Zeszyt 6, 1998. ; Rządca R., Negocjacje w interesach, PWE, Warszawa 2003. ; Rządca R. A., Wujec P., Negocjacje, PWE , Warszawa 1998. ; Sajkiewicz A. (red.), Zasoby ludzkie w firmie. Organizacja, kierowanie, ekonomika, Poltext, Warszawa 1999. ; Błaut R., Skuteczne negocjacje, CIM , Warszawa 1994. ; Salacuse J., Salacuse J. W., Negocjacje na rynkach międzynarodowych, PWE, Warszawa 1994. ; Schelling T. C., Arms and the influence, Yale University Press, New Haven 1966. ; Schelling T. C., The strategy of conflict, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA 1960. ; Sebenius J. K., Negotiation Analysis: A Characterization and Review, ,,Management Science", Vol. 38, No. 1, 1992. ; Shubik M., Game Theory in Social Sciences. Concepts and solutions, The MIT Press, Cambridge 1982. ; Sikora J., Zarządzanie konfliktem w zakładzie pracy, TNOIK, Bydgoszcz 1998. ; Smith W. H., "Conflict", ,,Management Reviev", 1974; Omówienie [w:] ,,Organizacja i Kierowanie", nr 4, 1975. ; Sosnowska H., (red.), Grupowe podejmowanie decyzji, Scholar, Warszawa 2005. ; Spector B., Negotiation as a Psychological Process, [in:] I. W. Zartman (ed.), Negotiation Process: Theories and Applications, Sage, Beverly Hills, CA, 1978. ; Stelmaszczyk M., Negocjowanie kontraktów handlowych. Poradnik dla eksporterów i importerów, CDKHZ, Warszawa 1992. ; Brdulak H., Brdulak J., Negocjacje handlowe, PWE, Warszawa 2000. ; Stępniewski J., Metoda negocjacji. Przygotowanie – techniki – sytuacje, AE we Wrocławiu, Wrocław 2001. ; Stoner J. A. F., Freeman R. E., Gilbert D. R., Kierowanie, PWE, Warszawa 2001. ; Stoner J. A. F., Wankel Ch., Kierowanie, PWE, Warszawa 1994. ; Straffin P., Teoria gier, Wydawnictwo Naukowe Scholar, Warszawa 2000. ; Szaban J., Negocjacje jako jedna z technik zarządzania, Doskonalenie Kadr Kierowniczych, nr 2, 1986. ; Szapiro T., Co decyduje o decyzji, PWN, Warszawa 1993. ; Szapiro T., Podejście interaktywne we wspomaganiu podejmowania decyzji, ,,Monografie i Opracowania", nr 338, SGPIS, Warszawa 1991. ; Szostak A., Zarządzanie konfliktem, ,,Personel", nr 4, 1996. ; Szczepański J., Elementarne pojęcia socjologii, PWN, Warszawa 1969. ; Sztumski J., Konflikty społeczne i negocjacje jako metody ich przezwyciężania, Wydawnictwo Wydziału Zarządzania Politechniki Częstochowskiej, Częstochowa 2000. ; Brdulak H., Brdulak J., Sztuka i technika negocjacji handlowych, Wyd. Bizant, Warszawa 1996. ; Thomas K., Conflict and conflict management, [in:] Dunette M. D (ed.), Handbook of Industrial and Organizational Psychology, Rand McNally, Chicago 1976. ; Thompson L., The mind and heart of the negotiator, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 2001. ; Thompson V., Modern organizations, Knopf, New York 1961. ; Thompson T. D., Organizations in action, McGraw-Hill, New York 1967 ; Thompson W., A class of solutions to bargaining Problems, "Journal of Economic Theory", Vol. 25, 1981. ; Thompson W., Cooperative models of bargaining, [in:] R. J. Aumann, S. Hart, (ed.), Handbook of game theory with economic applications, t. II, Elsevier 1994. ; Uniszewski Z., Konflikty i negocjacje, Prószyński i S-ka, Poznań 2000. ; Ury W., Odchodząc od nie. Negocjowanie od konfrontacji do kooperacji, PWE, Warszawa 1995. ; Wachowicz T., E-negocjacje. Modelowanie, analiza i wspomaganie, Wydawnictwo AE w Katowicach, Katowice 2006. ; Walas J., Konflikt na cenzurowanym, "Personel", 1996. ; Burns T., Caldas J. C., Roszkowska E., Generalized Game Theory's Contribution to Multi-agent Modelling Addressing Problems of Social Regulation, Social Order, and Effective Security, [in:] B. Dunin-Keplicz. A. Jankowski, A. Skowron, M. A. Szczuka (eds.), Monitoring, Security and Rescue Techniques in Multiagent Systems, Springer, Verlag 2005. ; Wall J. A., Stark J. B., Standifer R. L., Mediation. A current review and theory development, ,,Journal of Conflict Resolution", Vol. 45 (3), 2001. ; Watkins M., Sztuka negocjacji w biznesie. Innowacyjne podejścia prowadzące do przełomu, Wydawnictwo ONE Press, Warszawa 2005. ; Walton R. E., McKersie R. B., A Behavioral Theory of Labor Negotiations, ILR Press, Ithaca, New York 1993. ; Watson J., Strategia, Wprowadzenie do teorii gier, WNT, Warszawa 2005. ; Warschow T. A., Winning by Negotiation, McGraw Hill Book, New York 1990. ; Watson J. , Strategia. Wprowadzenie do teorii gier, WNT, Warszawa 2005. ; Weber R. A., Zasady zarządzania organizacjami, PWE, Warszawa 1990. ; Winch A., Winch S., Lepiej sprzedać, lepiej kupić. Taktyki perswazyjne w negocjacjach, ,,Personel", nr 13/14 (82/83), 2000. ; Winch S., Mity negocjacji, "Organizacja i Kierowanie", nr 2(112), 2003. ; Winch A., Winch S., Negocjacje. Jednostka, organizacja, kultura, Difin, Warszawa 2005. ; Burns T., Meeker L., Structural Properties and Resolutions of the Prisonier's Dilemma Game, [in:] A. Rapoport (eds.), Game Theory as the Conflict Resolution, Dordrecht-Holland, Reidel 1974. ; Von Neumann J., Morgenstern O., Theory of Games and Economic Behavior, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1972. ; Vliert E., Van de Prein E., The difference In the meaning of forcing In the conflict management of actors and observers, Referat na I Miedzynarodową Konferencję Grupy Kierowania Konfliktami, Fairfax, Wirginia 1987. ; Van de Vliert E., Kabanoff B., Toward Theory-Based Measures of Conflict Management, "The Academy of Management Journal", Vol. 33 (1). ; Zartman W. I. (ed.), International Multilateral Negotiation, Jossey-Bass, San Francisco 1994. ; Zbiegień-Maciąg L., Negocjowanie i negocjacje. Sposób na konflikty, Centrum Kreowania Liderów, Kłudzienko 1994. ; Zbiegień-Maciąg L., Taktyki i techniki negocjacyjne, Uczelniane Wydawnictwa Naukowo-Dydaktyczne, Kraków 2001. ; Zbiegiem Maciąg L., Zarządzanie personelem w firmie, Wydawnictwo AGH, Kraków 1995. ; Zarman I. W., Berman M., The Practical Negotiator, Yale University Press, New Haven, Connn. 1982. ; Burns T. Roszkowska E., Generalized Game Theory: Assumptions, Principles, and Elaborations Grounded in Social Theory, In Search of Social Order, Series. Studies in Logic, Grammar and Rhetoric, 2005, 8(21). ; Burns T., Roszkowska E., Economic and Social Equilibria: The Perspective of Generalized Game Theory, "Optimum. Studia Ekonomiczne", Nr 3(31), 2006. ; Burns T., Roszkowska E., Fuzzy Game Theory: The Perspective of the General Theory of Games on Nash and Normative Equilibria, [in:] S. K. Pal, L. Polkowski, A. Skowron (eds.), Rough-Neural Computing: Techniques for Computing with Words, Springer, Verlag 2003. ; Boulding K. E., Conflict and defense, Harper, New York 1962. ; Caderman L., Unpacking the National Interest: An Analysis of Preference Aggregation in Ordinal Games, [in:] Game Theory and International Relations. Candidate Images in Presidential Elections, Westport-London 1995. ; Carnevale P.J., Pruitt D.G., Negotiation and mediation, "Annu. Rev. Psychol.", No. 43, 1992. ; Casse P., Jak negocjować, Zysk i S-ka, Poznań 1996. ; Cenker E. M., Negocjacje, Wydawnictwo Wyższej Szkoły Komunikacji i Zarządzania w Poznaniu, Poznań 2002. ; Chełpa S., Witkowski T., Paradoks zgody, czyli zarządzanie w sytuacjach konfliktowych i zarządzanie przez konflikt, "Personel" 10(67) 1999. ; Chełpa S., Witkowski J., Psychologia konfliktów, Wydawnictwo Szkolne i Pedagogiczne, Warszawa 1995. ; Christopher E. M., Umiejętność negocjowania w biznesie, ZYSK i S-KA, Poznań 1998. ; Coddington A. J., Theories of the Bargaining Process, Aldine, Chicago 1968. ; Collins A., Mowa ciała, Oficyna Wydawnicza Rytm, Warszawa 2002. ; Colman A., Game Theory and Experimental Games: The Study of Strategic Interaction, Oxford-New York, Toronto-Sydney-Paris-Frankfurt 1982. ; Coser L. A., Funkcjonalna teoria konfliktu, [w:] J. Turner, Struktura teorii socjologicznej, PWN, Warszawa 1985. ; Cross J. G., Negotiation as a Learning Process, "Journal of Conflict Resolution", Vol. 21, 1977. ; Cyret R, March G., A behavioral theory of the firm, Oxford University Press, London 1963. ; Dana D., Rozwiązywanie konfliktów, PWE, Warszawa 1993. ; Dąbrowski P., Praktyczna teoria negocjacji, Sorbog, Warszawa 1991. ; Deutsch M., The resolution of conflict. Constructive and destructive process, Yale Univ. Pr., New Haven, New Haven 1973. ; Deutsch M., Cooperation and conflict: a personal perspective on the history of the social psychological study of conflict resolution West, M.A, [in:] D. J. Tjosvold, G. H. Smith (eds.), International handbook of organizational Teamwork and Cooperative Working, Wiley&Sons 2003. ; Domański S. R., Kapitał ludzki a wzrost gospodarczy, Wydawnictwo Naukowe PWN, Warszawa 1993. ; Drabik E., Elementy teorii gier dla ekonomistów, Wydawnictwo UwB, Białystok 1998. ; Drucker P. F., Praktyka zarządzania, Czytelnik, Kraków, 1994. ; Druckman D., Boundary Role Conflict: Negotiation as Dual Responsiveness, "Journal of Conflict Resolution", 1977, Vol. 21. ; Eisenhardt K. M., Kahwajy J. I., Bourgeois L. J. III, How Management Teams Can Have o Good Fight, Harvard Business Review, July-August, 1997. ; Fisburn P. C., Rubinstein A., Time preference, International Economic Review, (23) 1982. ; Fiszer R., Ury W., Patton B., Dochodząc do Tak. Negocjowanie bez poddawania się, PWE, Warszawa 1996. ; Flower A., Jak skutecznie negocjować, Petit, Warszawa 1991. ; Friedman W. J., Game theory with applications to economics, Oxford University Press, Oxford 1990. ; Galas Z., Nykowski I., Żółkiewski Z., Programowanie wielokryterialne, PWE, Warszawa 1987. ; Gasparski W., Etyka biznesu, PWN, Warszawa 2000. ; Gesteland R. F., Różnice kulturowe a zachowania w biznesie, PWN, Warszawa 2000. ; Gomolińska A., Rule Complexes for Representing Social Actors and Interactions, "Studies in Logic Grammar, and Rhetoric", No. 3(16), 1999. ; Gonciarski W., Konflikt niejedno ma imię (1), "Personel", 4(7), 1995. ; Gonciarski W., Konflikt niejedno ma imię (2), "Personel", 5(8), 1995. ; Gonciarski W., Konflikt niejedno ma imię (3), "Personel", 6(9), 1995. ; Goncarski W., Jak kierować konfliktami? (cz. I), "Personel", 7(10), 1995. ; Goncarski W., Jak kierować konfliktami? (cz II), "Personel", 8(11), 1995. ; Graham J., Vis-a-vis. International business negotiation, [in:] P. Ghauri, J.C. Claude Usunier (eds.), International Business Negotiations, Pergamon 1996. ; Griffin R., Podstawy zarządzania organizacjami, Wydawnictwo Naukowe PWN, Warszawa 2007. ; Gulliver P. H., Disputes and Negotiations: A Cross-Cultural Perspective, Academic Press, Orlando 1979. ; Hamman J., Demokracja, decyzje, wybory, Wydawnictwo Naukowe Scholar, Warszawa 2004. ; Harsany J. C., Approaches to the bargaining problem before and after the theory of games: a critical discussion of Zeuthen's, Hick's and Nash's theories, "Econometrica", (24) 1956. ; Harsany J., Game Theory and the Analysis of International Conflict, [in:] James S. Rosenau (ed.), International Politics and Foreign Policy, Free Press, New York 1969. ; Harsanyi J. C., Selten J., A Generalized Nash Solution for Two-person Bargaining Games with Incomplete Information, ,,Management Science", No. 18, 1972. ; Hawes L., Smith D., A critique of the assumption underlying the study of communication in conflict, ,,Speech Monographs", T.59, No. 4, 1973. ; Hawkins L., Hundson M., Cornall R., Prawnik jako negocjator, "ABC", Warszawa 1994. ; Houba H., Sneek K., Vardy F., Can Negotiations Prevent Fish Wars?, Tinbergen Institute, Discussion Paper 1996. ; Morrow J. D., Game Theory for Political Scientists, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1994. ; Jankowski W. B. , Sankowski T. P., Jak negocjować, CIM, Warszawa 1995. ; Jastrzębska-Smolaga H. (red.), Ekonomiczne podstawy negocjacji. Pomiędzy prawem a moralnością, Difin, Warszawa 2007. ; Juchnowicz M. (red.), Elastyczne zarządzanie kapitałem ludzkim w organizacji wiedzy, Difin, Warszawa 2007. ; Kowalczyk-Grzenkiewicz J., Arcimowicz J., Jermakow P., Rozwiązywanie konfliktów, sztuka negocjacji i komunikacji, Oficyna Wydawnicza Politechniki Warszawskiej, Warszawa 2003. ; Kalai E., Proportional solutions to bargaining Situations: Interpersonal Utility Comparisons, ,,Econometrica", (45) 1977. ; Kalai E., Smorodinsky M., Other solutions to Nash's Bargaining Problem, ,,Econometrica", No. 43, 1975. ; Kałążna-Drewińska U., Negocjacje w biznesie. Kluczowe problemy, Wydawnictwo AE we Wrocławiu, Wrocław 2006. ; Kamiński J., Negocjowanie techniki rozwiązywania konfliktów, Poltext, Warszawa 2003. ; Kamiński J., Modele procesów negocjacji, "Optimum. Studia Ekonomiczne", nr 1(5), 2000. ; Kamiński J., Negocjacje w biznesie jako przedmiot zainteresowania nauk ekonomicznych, "Optimum. Studia Ekonomiczne", nr 4(24), 2002. ; Kamiński J. Negocjacje w działalności marketingowej przedsiębiorstw, Wydawnictwo Uniwersytetu w Białymstoku, Białystok 2006. ; Karrass G., Dobić targu, Wydawnictwo Businessman, Sopot 1991. ; Kennedy G., Negocjacje doskonałe, Dom Wydawniczy REBIS, Poznań 1999. ; Kerstern G. E., Szapiro T., Generalized Approach to Modeling Negotiations, "European Journal of Operational Reseach", Vol. 26, 1986. ; Kersten G. E., Szapiro T., Generalized Approach to Modelling Negotiations, "European Journal of Operational Reseach", Vol. 35, No. 1, 1986. ; Kipnis D., Smith S. M., An influence Perspective on Bargaining within Organizations, "Research on Negotiation in Organizations", Vol. 1, 1983. ; Kowalczyk-Grzenkowicz J., Arcimowicz J., Jermakowicz P., Rozwiązywanie konfliktów, sztuka negocjacji i komunikacji, Oficyna Wydawnicza Politechniki Warszawskiej, Warszawa 2003. ; Kowalczyk E., Psychologiczne uwarunkowania negocjacji gospodarczych, Wydawnictwo Akademii Ekonomicznej w Poznaniu, Poznań 2001. ; Kozielecki J., Konflikt, teoria gier i psychologia, PWN, Warszawa 1970. ; Kozioł L., Tyrańska M., Bińczycki B. , Metody analizy strategicznej w obszarze zarządzania zasobami ludzkimi, AE w Krakowie, Zeszyty Naukowe Nr 603, 2002. ; Kozina A., Style negocjowania-analiza porównawcza, Zeszyty Naukowe Akademii Ekonomicznej w Krakowie, Nr 561, 2001. ; Koźmiński A. K., Piotrowski W. (red.), Zarządzanie. Teoria i praktyka, Wydawnictwo Naukowe PWN, Warszawa 1998. ; Kreps D., Game Theory and Economic Modelling, Oxford University Press, Oxford 1990. ; Kreps D., A Course in Microeconomics Theory, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1990. ; Kreps D. M., Wilson R., Sequential equilibria, "Econometrica", No. 50, 1982. ; Kruś L., Bronisz P., Łopuch B., MCBARG System Supporting Multicriteria Bargaining, "Control and Cybernetics", Vol. 22, No. 4, 1993. ; Krzymieniewska G., Od walki do współpracy. Negocjacyjna sztuka zawierania porozumień, TNOIK, Bydgoszcz 1998. ; Kuc B. R., Moczydłowska J. M., Zachowania organizacyjne, Difin, Warszawa 2009.

El objeto del presente trabajo de investigación es determinar la influencia del Derecho Urbanístico en el desarrollo de la ciudad sostenible, y en particular en la República del Ecuador. La investigación se justifica por la imperiosa necesidad de contar con marcos jurídicos actualizados que garanticen la superación de las carencias y problemas urbanos, con un fuerte compromiso para tutelar derechos humanos, sociales y urbanos, para respaldar una debida distribución del suelo y para aplicar una planificación urbana dirigida a lograr modelos de desarrollo inclusivos, seguros y sostenibles en las ciudades. En la investigación analizamos la influencia que tiene el Derecho Urbanístico en el desarrollo de ciudades sostenibles, ya que por las condiciones que caracterizan a la ciudad moderna de órgano contaminante, consumidora de recursos y productora de exclusión social, se demandan entornos citadinos con normativa jurídica que regule el correcto uso del suelo para promover ambientes ordenados, equitativos y saludables que garanticen la calidad de vida de los ciudadanos y el respeto al medio ambiente. Además, otra causa para presentar este trabajo es indagar las características especiales atribuidas a la ciudad sostenible, que avalan el pleno ejercicio de derechos humanos y el mejoramiento de la calidad de vida en la ciudad moderna; de tal manera que, considerando los beneficios que genera la ciudad sostenible en la vida humana y en el ambiente, se estudien los medios e instrumentos propicios para lograr su impulso y desarrollo, siendo uno de ellos, el Derecho Urbanístico, rama del Derecho que paralelamente debe ser analizada para verificar y comprobar su útil, efectivo y eficiente aporte que puede ofrecer para lograr un desarrollo sostenible en la ciudad. La investigación es de carácter documental bibliográfica y de tipo cualitativa, exploratoria, descriptiva y analítica. En primer lugar, abordamos la cuestión desde la perspectiva que exige este tipo de investigación y exponemos algunos asuntos particulares sobre la selección y definición del tema, planteamiento y formalización del problema, hipótesis, pregunta de la investigación, objetivo general, objetivos específicos, justificación metodológica, justificación práctica, el marco teórico y metodológico de la investigación, antecedentes, estado de la cuestión, definiciones conceptuales y cronograma. En segundo lugar, verificamos la relación que existe entre la ciudad, el Urbanismo y la planificación urbana, para recordar y comprobar que esta esencial vinculación, no siempre valorada y utilizada en su justa medida, debe ser debidamente reconocida y aplicada para favorecer el desarrollo de la ciudad que, concebida como el espacio físico donde los individuos realizan la mayor parte de sus actividades y donde materializan muchos de sus derechos fundamentales individuales, y donde confluyen con mayor fuerza intereses colectivos como la protección del medio ambiente o de un espacio público adecuado, necesita de la intervención de la ciencia del Urbanismo para organizar sus espacios a través del ordenamiento territorial y urbanístico aplicados en la planificación urbana, cuyas normas técnicas deben ser acogidas por un marco legal que les suministre el valor jurídico para que tengan carácter vinculante en los habitantes de la ciudad. Es decir, la ciudad, el Urbanismo y la planificación urbana, relacionados entre sí, también requieren y están vinculados a la ciencia del Derecho. Esta parte de la investigación estudia la ciudad, el Urbanismo y la planificación urbana, elementos interrelacionados entre sí y vinculados al Derecho, que constituyen el trípode que sostiene, conceptualmente, el análisis posterior de las dos temáticas principales de la investigación que son: el Derecho Urbanístico y la ciudad sostenible. En tercer lugar, examinamos el concepto, las características, el contenido, los principios y la competencia del Derecho Urbanístico, así como también las disciplinas jurídicas y no jurídicas que se relacionan con éste y la existencia de leyes urbanísticas nacionales en América Latina. Es decir, las particularidades de esta rama del Derecho con la finalidad de indagar su objeto y sus objetivos principales, para determinarlo como el marco jurídico que garantiza a la ciudad, el Urbanismo y la planificación urbana, el debido y armónico cumplimiento de sus particulares funciones, y finalmente establecer la significativa influencia que tiene para impulsar y promover el desarrollo de ciudades sostenibles. En cuarto lugar, ejecutamos un examen de la ciudad sostenible, modelo estudiado profundamente mediante las aproximaciones conceptuales, el desarrollo sostenible, la sostenibilidad urbana, el derecho a la ciudad y, especialmente, a través del análisis de las características de la ciudad sostenible, análisis utilizado para la construcción de un modelo teórico de ciudad sostenible que sirva de referencia para la normativa jurídica urbanística; posteriormente, identificando los síntomas de insostenibilidad que se producen en la ciudad para establecer una estructura de estrategias de sostenibilidad aplicable al Derecho Urbanístico. En quinto lugar, efectuamos un estudio de caso del Derecho Urbanístico y la ciudad sostenible en la República del Ecuador, que comprende los antecedentes y la descripción del marco jurídico del ordenamiento territorial y urbanístico en la República del Ecuador; el análisis del contenido y la implementación de la Ley Orgánica de Ordenamiento Territorial, Uso y Gestión del Suelo, para determinar si el Derecho Urbanístico en este país, cuenta con la autonomía y las características necesarias que puedan influir significativamente en el desarrollo de ciudades sostenibles; las características de las ciudades ecuatorianas; y, un análisis de sostenibilidad a la "Ordenanza Reformatoria a la Ordenanza que Regula el Desarrollo y el Ordenamiento Territorial del Cantón Portoviejo e incorpora el Título Innumerado denominado: Del Plan Maestro Urbano del GAD Portoviejo", cantón ubicado en la provincia de Manabí, República del Ecuador, mediante la aplicación de la estructura de estrategias de sostenibilidad aplicable al Derecho Urbanístico, que es una propuesta del presente trabajo de investigación. Finalmente presentamos las conclusiones que son las ideas de culminación de la investigación ejecutada a fin de colaborar con el acervo académico. Entre los hallazgos más relevantes de la investigación se determina, entre los principales, que la ciudad sostenible es el objeto del Derecho Urbanístico y que los objetivos principales de la normativa jurídica urbanística se encuentran dirigidos a regular el uso del suelo, los procesos de urbanización y la conducta social, que generan tres elementos interrelacionados que son: el territorio, la urbanización y la población; que el Derecho Urbanístico tiene los méritos suficientes para que no solo sea considerado como dependiente del Derecho Administrativo, sino como una rama del Derecho con autonomía didáctica, científica y legislativa; que el modelo de desarrollo urbano de la ciudad compacta es el más conveniente para lograr una ciudad sostenible; que el modelo teórico de la ciudad sostenible propuesto comprende doce características, siendo seis criterios urbanísticos y seis derechos humanos; que en el Derecho Urbanístico de la República del Ecuador se han omitido estrategias de sostenibilidad, es decir, no se han establecido criterios generales para una ordenación urbanística sostenible en las ciudades. El presente trabajo de investigación está estructurado en seis capítulos bien caracterizados, a saber: En el capítulo primero se muestran los aspectos en concreto que han motivado el desarrollo de este estudio partiendo de la situación del problema que se presenta en el mundo sobre la necesidad de marcos jurídicos para desarrollar ciudades sostenibles, que garanticen entornos equitativos, inclusivos y dignos para una vida de calidad; se presentan las preguntas y los objetivos de la investigación, así como las decisiones metodológicas realizadas para diseñarla; y, el cronograma y la organización de esta tesis doctoral. En el capítulo segundo se analizan las construcciones semánticas y conceptuales de la ciudad en general, se realiza una revisión de los conceptos que sobre el urbanismo se han emitido y que durante la historia lo han considerado como arte, técnica y como una ciencia en continua evolución que se encarga de la ordenación de las ciudades; y, se expone una breve reseña histórica sobre la evolución del urbanismo, que resume, de manera paralela, las características de las ciudades que han utilizado criterios urbanísticos para su constitución y desarrollo histórico, hasta llegar a la etapa en que el urbanismo acoge el paradigma de la sostenibilidad, surgiendo el urbanismo sostenible. Se hace referencia a la planificación urbana, que genera los planes territoriales y urbanísticos, sobre los cuales se analiza sus objetivos, sus características, su contenido y su naturaleza jurídica. En el capítulo tercero se examinan diferentes conceptos que sobre el Derecho Urbanístico han emitido tratadistas de varios países en diferentes años. Se analizan la autonomía disciplinar y se exploran las características, los principios, el contenido y la competencia de esta rama del Derecho. Se realiza un somero estudio sobre las relaciones del Derecho Urbanístico con diferentes disciplinas jurídicas y no jurídicas; y, finalmente, se efectúa una indagación sobre la existencia de los marcos jurídicos territoriales y urbanísticos que constituyen el Derecho Urbanístico en América Latina. En el capítulo cuarto se efectúa un estudio conceptual de la ciudad como el bien satisfactor de las necesidades humanas y como el derecho denominado "derecho a la ciudad", se realiza una descripción de las aproximaciones al concepto de desarrollo sostenible y se examinan las características de la sostenibilidad urbana, se analizan la ciudad compacta y la ciudad dispersa como dos modelos antagónicos de desarrollo urbano, se describen y exploran los criterios emitidos por varios autores sobre las características de la ciudad sostenible, para finalmente elaborar una propuesta de un modelo teórico de ciudad sostenible y una estructura de estrategias, criterios y subcriterios de sostenibilidad, aplicable para evaluar al Derecho Urbanístico. En el capítulo quinto centramos la atención al estudio del sistema jurídico del ordenamiento territorial y urbanístico en el Ecuador, se expone una revisión analítica de la normativa para el ordenamiento territorial y urbanístico en este país, mereciendo la Ley Orgánica de Ordenamiento Territorial, Uso y Gestión del Suelo especial notoriedad el análisis crítico de su contenido en general, para posteriormente hacer una descripción de las características y las evidencias de insostenibilidad que muestran las ciudades ecuatorianas; y, finalmente aplicar la propuesta de estrategias, criterios y subcriterios de sostenibilidad a la Ordenanza Reformatoria a la Ordenanza que Regula el Desarrollo y el Ordenamiento Territorial del Cantón Portoviejo. El capítulo sexto comprende la discusión de resultados y reflexiones finales con lo que se deja constancia de la conclusión general y de las conclusiones particulares de la investigación, así como también futuras líneas de investigación. Por lo tanto, luego de la discusión de resultados que constituimos entre el contenido de los capítulos segundo, tercero, cuarto y quinto, se establece como conclusión general que el Derecho Urbanístico es el principal campo jurídico en el que se está construyendo la nueva visión del crecimiento urbano para convertirlo en desarrollo urbano sostenible, porque está constituido por un conjunto de normas jurídicasurbanísticas que tienen como objeto principal lograr una ciudad sostenible; como objetivos regular el ordenamiento del territorio, los procesos de urbanización y el comportamiento social; y, como ámbitos de aplicación el territorio, la urbanización y la población de una ciudad; normativa jurídica urbanística que debe contar con estrategias de sostenibilidad para cumplir con su objeto que es la ciudad sostenible; por consiguiente, es la rama del Derecho y el instrumento legal que tiene una significativa influencia para lograr desarrollar ciudades sostenibles. Sin embargo, el Derecho Urbanístico en la República del Ecuador no es reconocido en su justa medida, y, por consiguiente, no es utilizado eficiente, efectiva y convenientemente, como el instrumento jurídico que puede contener la normativa urbanística con estrategias de sostenibilidad para hacer factible una política urbana orientada a conseguir ciudades sostenibles, por lo tanto, su actual estado no le permite tener una significativa influencia en el desarrollo de ciudades sostenibles. ; The purpose of this research work is to determine the influence of Urban Law on the development of sustainable cities, and in particular in the Republic of Ecuador. The investigation is justified by the urgent need to have updated legal frameworks that guarantee the overcoming of urban deficiencies and problems, with a strong commitment to protect human, social and urban rights, to support a proper distribution of land and to apply planning aimed at achieving inclusive, safe and sustainable development models in cities. In the research we analyze the influence that Urban Law has on the development of sustainable cities, since due to the conditions that characterize the modern city as a polluting organism, a consumer of resources and a producer of social exclusion, city environments are demanded with legal regulations that regulate the correct use of the land to promote orderly, equitable and healthy environments that guarantee the quality of life of citizens and respect for the environment. In addition, another reason to present this work is to investigate the special characteristics attributed to the sustainable city, which guarantee the full exercise of human rights and the improvement of the quality of life in the modern city; In such a way that, considering the benefits that the sustainable city generates in human life and in the environment, the means and instruments conducive to achieving its promotion and development are studied, one of them being Urban Law, a branch of Law that in parallel It must be analyzed to verify and verify its useful, effective and efficient contribution that it can offer to achieve sustainable development in the city. The research is of a bibliographic documentary nature and of a qualitative, exploratory, descriptive and analytical nature. First, we approach the question from the perspective that this type of research demands and we expose some particular issues on the selection and definition of the topic, approach and formalization of the problem, hypothesis, research question, general objective, specific objectives, methodological justification, practical justification, the theoretical and methodological framework of the research, background, state of the question, conceptual definitions and timeline. Second, we verify the relationship that exists between the city, Urbanism and urban planning, to remember and verify that this essential link, not always valued and used in its proper measure, must be duly recognized and applied to favor the development of the city that, conceived as the physical space where individuals carry out most of their activities and where they materialize many of their fundamental individual rights, and where collective interests such as the protection of the environment or adequate public space converge with greater force, It needs the intervention of the science of Urbanism to organize its spaces through the territorial and urban planning applied in urban planning, whose technical standards must be accepted by a legal framework that provides them with the legal value so that they are binding on the inhabitants from the city. That is, the city, Urbanism and urban planning, related to each other, also require and are linked to the science of Law. This part of the research studies the city, Urbanism and urban planning, interrelated elements and linked to Law, which constitute the tripod that conceptually supports the subsequent analysis of the two main themes of the research which are: Law Urban development and the sustainable city. Third, we examine the concept, characteristics, content, principles and competence of Urban Law, as well as the legal and non-legal disciplines that are related to it and the existence of national urban planning laws in Latin America. That is, the particularities of this branch of law in order to investigate its object and its main objectives, to determine it as the legal framework that guarantees the city, Urbanism and urban planning, the due and harmonious fulfillment of its particular functions, and finally to establish the significant influence it has to drive and promote the development of cities. sustainable. Fourth, we carry out an examination of the sustainable city, a model deeply studied through conceptual approaches, sustainable development, urban sustainability, the right to the city and, especially, through the analysis of the characteristics of the sustainable city, analysis used for the construction of a theoretical model of a sustainable city that serves as a reference for urban legal regulations; subsequently, identifying the symptoms of unsustainability that occur in the city to establish a structure of sustainability strategies applicable to Urban Law. Fifthly, we carry out a case study of Urban Law and the sustainable city in the Republic of Ecuador, which includes the background and description of the legal framework of territorial and urban planning in the Republic of Ecuador; the analysis of the content and the implementation of the Organic Law of Territorial Ordering, Land Use and Management, to determine if the Urban Law in this country has the autonomy and the necessary characteristics that can significantly influence the development of sustainable cities; the characteristics of Ecuadorian cities; and, a sustainability analysis to the "Reform Ordinance to the Ordinance that Regulates the Development and Territorial Ordering of the Canton Portoviejo and incorporates the Unnumbered Title called: From the Urban Master Plan of the GAD Portoviejo", canton located in the province of Manabí, Republic of Ecuador, through the application of the structure of sustainability strategies applicable to Urban Law, which is a proposal of this research work. Finally, we present the conclusions that are the ideas of culmination of the research carried out in order to collaborate with the academic heritage. Among the most relevant findings of the research, it is determined, among the main ones, that the sustainable city is the object of Urban Planning Law and that the main objectives of urban legal regulations are aimed at regulating land use, urbanization processes and social behavior, which generate three interrelated elements that are: territory, urbanization and population; that Urban Law has sufficient merits so that it is not only considered as dependent on Administrative Law, but as a branch of Law with didactic, scientific and legislative autonomy; that the urban development model of the compact city is the most convenient to achieve a sustainable city; that the theoretical model of the proposed sustainable city includes twelve characteristics, being six urban criteria and six human rights; that in the Urban Planning Law of the Republic of Ecuador, sustainability strategies have been omitted, that is, general criteria have not been established for sustainable urban planning in cities. This research work is structured in six wellcharacterized chapters, namely: In the first chapter, the specific aspects that have motivated the development of this study are shown, starting from the situation of the problem that arises in the world about the need for legal frameworks to develop sustainable cities, which guarantee equitable, inclusive and dignified environments for a quality life; The questions and objectives of the research are presented, as well as the methodological decisions made to design it; and, the schedule and organization of this doctoral thesis. In the second chapter, the semantic and conceptual constructions of the city in general are analyzed, a review is made of the concepts that have been issued on urbanism and that during history have considered it as art, technique and as a science in continuous evolution that is in charge of the organization of the cities; and, the sustainable city are described and explored brief historical review on the evolution of urban planning, which summarizes, in a parallel way, the characteristics of cities that have used urban criteria for their constitution and historical development, until reaching the stage in which urban planning embraces the paradigm of sustainability, emerging sustainable urbanism. Reference is made to urban planning, which generates territorial and urban plans, on which its objectives, its characteristics, its content and its legal nature are analyzed. In the third chapter, different concepts that on Urban Law have been issued by writers from various countries in different years are examined. Disciplinary autonomy is analyzed and the characteristics, principles, content and competence of this branch of Law are explored. A brief study is carried out on the relations of Urban Law with different legal and non-legal disciplines; and, finally, an inquiry is made about the existence of the territorial and urban legal frameworks that constitute the Urban Law in Latin America. In the fourth chapter, a conceptual study of the city is carried out as a good satisfying human needs and as the right called "right to the city", a description of the approaches to the concept of sustainable development is made and the characteristics of urban sustainability, the compact city and the dispersed city are analyzed as two antagonistic models of urban development, the criteria issued by various authors on the characteristics of, to finally elaborate a proposal for a theoretical model of the city sustainability and a structure of strategies, criteria and sub-criteria of sustainability, applicable to evaluate Urban Law. In the fifth chapter we focus our attention on the study of the legal system of territorial and urban planning in Ecuador, an analytical review of the regulations for territorial and urban planning in this country is exposed, meriting the Organic Law of Territorial Planning, Use and Management of the soil special notoriety the critical analysis of its content in general, to later make a description of the characteristics and the evidence of unsustainability that Ecuadorian cities show; and, finally, apply the proposed strategies, criteria and sub-criteria of sustainability to the Reform Ordinance to the Ordinance that Regulates the Development and Territorial Order of the Canton Portoviejo. The sixth chapter includes the discussion of results and final reflections with which the general conclusion and the particular conclusions of the research are recorded, as well as future lines of research. Therefore, after the discussion of the results that we constitute between the content of the second, third, fourth and fifth chapters, it is established as a general conclusion that Urban Law is the main legal field in which the new vision of the city is being built. urban growth to turn it into sustainable urban development, because it is constituted by a set of legal-urban regulations whose main objective is to achieve a sustainable city; as objectives to regulate land use planning, urbanization processes and social behavior; and, as areas of application, the territory, urbanization and population of a city; urban legal regulations that must have sustainability strategies to fulfill its purpose, which is the sustainable city; therefore, it is the branch of law and the legal instrument that has a significant influence to achieve the development of sustainable cities. However, Urban Law in the Republic of Ecuador is not recognized in its fair measure, and, therefore, it is not used efficiently, effectively and conveniently, as the legal instrument that urban regulations can contain with sustainability strategies to make feasible an urban policy aimed at achieving sustainable cities, therefore, its current status does not allow it to have a significant influence on the development of sustainable cities.

Issue 52.1 of the Review for Religious, January/February 1993. ; rel i gious Christian Heritages and C0mempora~ Living JANUARY-FEBRUARY1993 ,,VOLUME52 ¯ NUMBERi Review for Religious (ISSN 0034-639X) is published bi-monthly at Saint Louis University by the Jesuits of the Missouri Province. Editorial Office: 3601 Lindell Boulevard ¯ St. Louis, Missouri 63108-3393. Telephone: 314-535-3048 ¯ FAX: 314-535-0601 Manuscripts, books for review, and correspondence with the editor: Review for Religious ¯ 3601 Lindell Boulevard ¯ St. Louis, Missouri 63108-3393. Correspondence about the Canonical Counsel department: Elizabeth McDonough OP ¯ 5001 Eastern Avenue ° P.O. Box 29260 Washington, D.C. 20017. POSTMASTER Send address changes to Review for Religious ¯ P.O. Box 6070 ¯ Duluth, MN 55806. Second-class postage paid at St. Louis, Missouri, and additional mailing offices. SUBSCRIPTION RATES Single copy $5 includes surface mailing costs. One-year subscription $15 plus mailing costs. Two-year subscription $28 plus mailing costs. See inside back cover for more subscription information and mailing costs. ©1993 Review for Religious for religious Editor Associate Editors Canonical Counsel Editor Assistant Editors Advisory Board David L. Fleming sJ Philip C. Fischer SJ Michael G. Harter SJ Elizabeth McDonough OP Jean Read Mary Ann Foppe Joann Wolski Conn PhD Mary Margaret Johanning SSND Iris Anti Ledden SSND Edmundo Rodriguez SJ S~fin Sammon FMS Wendy Wright PhD Suzanne Zuercher OSB Christian Heritages and Contemporary Living JM',/UARY-FEBRUARY 1993 ¯ VOLUME 52 " NUMBER 1 contents 6 feature The Religious Life Futures Project: Executive Summary David J. Nygren CM and Miriam D. Ukeritis CSJ provide a summary of "The Future of Religious Orders in the United States" (FORUS), a comprehensive study of the opinions, beliefs, attitudes, and practices of men and women religious. 56 69 growing spiritually A Developmental View of Salesian Spirituality Joann Wolski Conn examines a process of self-knowledge through the lens of the lives of St. Francis de Sales and St. Jane de Chantal. The Cloistered Heart Nancy Shuman provides snapshots of her journey into a heart cloister for finding a union with God. discerning vocation 86 The Transfer and the RCIA: Process and Ritual 102 Kathleen Hughes RSCJ and Barbara Quinn RSCJ draw outlines of development from the RCIA process for the transfer of a religious from one community to another. Vocations among Teaching Brothers Eleace King IHM provides the encouraging results of the CARA study of vocations in teaching brothers communities. 2 Review for Religious 111 119 131 living religious life Internationality: Intentional or Accidental Catherine M. Harmer MMS focuses on the structural aspects necessary for a religious group to be intentionally international. Mission before Mission: God's Mission within Us A. Paul Dominic SJ develops the insight that the mission of individual Christians is one and the same as God's mission in themselves. Talents for Living in Community Melannie Svoboda SND proposes eight "lesser" gifts of personality and attitude which enable people to live more graciously with others. departments 4 Prisms 140 Canonical Counsel: New Communities 147 Book Reviews January-February 1993 3 prisms Anew year ushers in new life. Newspapers in every city vie for the picture of the first baby born in the early moments of a new year. Perhaps all of us need to image ourselves in that picture of a newborn and ask our-selves what kind of fresh life we seek in this year 1993. As we enter into this new gift of time, God's grace con-tinues to be a light to our mind and a strength to our will. In 1993, what light do we seek for our faith, and what strength do we need to live in closer union with our Lord? Review for Religious hopes to focus some light where it will be helpful by highlighting an article in each issue of this new volume. Our present issue is privileged to publish "The Religious Life Futures Project: Executive Summary." David J. Nygren CM and Miriam D. Ukeritis csJ have worked some three years on a major study of religious life and its future in the United States. By means of this arti-cle, they present in a concise and understandable form the conceptual background, methodological considera-tions, research findings, and major implications of their three-year study. Because this article attempts to provide easy entrance to the complete study shortly to be pub-lished in book form, it also gives our readers a ready ref-erence for use with future articles that will either critique assumptions and method or suggest further developments implied in this study. The importance of the study lies especially in the breadth and thoroughness of its col|ection of data, rep-resented in it~ six independent elements: a national survey, leadership studies, a study of caring people and one of visioning groups, individual interviews, and a final theo-logical/ historical monograph. There is no doubt about its timeliness gince the church is now looking forward to the Review for Religious ninth assembly (in 1994) of a worldwide synod of bishops. The theme of the synod is "The consecrated life and its role in the church and in the world." Since bishops, priests, lay people, and religious need to be involved in the preparation and the followup of this and every church synod, Review for Religious hopes to be a channel of grace by bringing to its readers clear informative articles as well as inspiring motivational ones for the ever richer living out of the spiritual heritages found in particular religious families such as the Benedictine or the Franciscan. It is especially crucial that members of the institutes of con-secrated life become active participants in the presynodal reflec-tion. As for the hierarchy, the apostolic pronuncio reminded the assembled bishops of the United States in November 1992 that every bishop has a special responsibility regarding consecrated religious life. Ultimately all active Catholics need to become involved because the church is as healthy as religious life is healthy. For if the Spirit's charismatic structuring of the church, represented in the ever fecund religious-life form, appears to be weakening or becoming attenuated, then the body of the church in all its members suffers. Such an interrelatedness is reflected in the Pauline principle about the Body of Christ, and church history provides the data of its reality. While special articles will highlight this synod preparation, Review for Religious through its usual wide variety of spiritual topics will continue to bring fresh understandings and applica-tions of spiritual legacies to our Christian life. We hope that our readers will find both light and strength for their spiritual growth in 1993 through the contributions of our many authors. I would like to draw your attention to a new name added to the listing of our Advisory Board members. Joann Wolski Conn, with her doctorate in theology, teaches in the Neumann College Graduate Program in Pastoral CounselinF and Spiritual Direction, a program which assists spiritual.directors to use four great tra-ditions (Franciscan, Ignatian, Carmelite, and Salesian) in their ministry. Her books, Women's Spirituality (1986) and Spirituality and Personal Maturity (1989), have been well received. In this very issue our readers will profit from her "Developmental View of Salesian Spirituality." We look forward t6 her contribution to our board discussions and decisions for the good health and progress of this journal. David LI Fleming SJ 37anuary-February 1993 5 DAVID J. NYGREN and MIRIAM D. UKERITIS The Religious Life Futures Project: Executive Summary feature In this Executive Summary we attempt to provide in as concise and understandable a form as possible the conceptual back-ground, methodological considerations, research findings, and major implications of the Religious Life Futures Project. VVe also recognize the range of interests and various needs of the many persons like yourself who bare expressed great interest in reading the results. With that in mind, the following description of the con-tents of the various sections may assist you in selecting the point at which you would prefer to begin your reading. Section I presents the purpose of this research project. Section H provides the theoretical perspective. This includes some background information on the concept of trans-formation as used in studying groups and organizations. It also David J. Nygren CM, an organizational psychologist, and Miriam D. Ukeritis csJ, a clinical psychologist, began work on this three-year study at Boston University in 1989 and completed it at De Paul University in Chicago in 1992. Nygren is now director of the Center for Applied Social Research and assistant professor of organizational psychology at De Paul University. Ukeritis is director of the Institute for Leadership of Religious Organizations at De Paul and a research associate in its Center for Applied Social Research. They may be addressed at De Paul University; Center for Applied Social Research; 2219 North Kenmore Avenue; Chicago, Illinois 60614. NOTE. This study in modified form was originally pub-lished in Origins 22, no. 15 (24 September 1992). 6 Review for Religious provides some information on the levels of change (social institution, congregational, and individual) considered in this project. Section III provides a description of each of the six research units and of the methodology for each of them and then offers summary find-ings. Results are presented in terms of the analysis described above. Section IV, "Conclusions: Shaping the Future, "presents the summary conclusions of the entire project. If you are interested in "bot-tom lines, "you may want to start your reading with this section. Some may wonder why we did not present this chapter first. When, in shar-ing our results with some groups, we began by presenting a summary of our findings, we were repeatedly asked, "Where/bow did you reach these conclusions?" Hence, in this executive summary, we begin at the begin-ning and work through to the conclusions. Subsequent publications of the results of this study will refer to these findings as The Future of Religious Orders in the United States (FO~U3). Table of Contents I. Introduction and Purpose .8. II. Theoretical Perspective . 9 A. The Concept of Transformation . 9 B. Levels of Change . 12 III. Research Units . 16 A. National Survey . 17 B. Leadership . 30 C. Visioning Groups . 35 D. Caring People . 38 E. Individual Interviews. . 40 E Theological/Historical Monograph .42 Conclusions: Shaping the Future .42 Acknowledgments . 51 References . 51 Bibliographical Notes . 52 January-February 1993 7 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project I. Introduction and Purpose The 30 years since the Second Vatican Council have been turbu-lent ones for Roman Catholic religious orders in the United States. The average age of the members of many congregations has increased to 67 years, while the number of religious has decreased approximately 45% for brothers and sisters and 27% for religious priests. Sevei'al "traditional" works, have been called into question while other works and other definitions of mission have arisen. The understanding of ways of living the vows ha~ changed substantially within many congregations. The distinction between religious life and the "laity" has also decreased considerably, with many "lay people" now developing some type of formal associa-tion with religious congregations and many religious identifying more clearly with lay people. How can such phenomena, which apply in many congrega-tions and across the traditional distinctioris of religious life (con-templative, monastic, mendicant, and apostolic), be best understood? How do individual religious and congregations expe-rience and understand the changes that have taken place in reli-gious life? What do these changes portend for the future of religious life? And, most important, what changes must yet occur if religious life is to remain a vital gift to the church into the next millennium? These were the questions with which we began the Religious Life Futures Project in 1989. Our own congregations, the Vincentian Fathers and Brothers and the Sisters of St. Joseph of Carondelet, are but two of the hundreds of congregations that were seeking to transform their lives, ministries, and institutions. With the support of our respective congregations and with a gen-erous grant from Lilly Endowment, we designed a comprehensive study of religious orders in the United States. Basic Purpose of the Research Our purpose was to examine the changes that are occurring in the experience and the understanding of religious life. To accom-plish this end we embarked upon a project that would have as its outcomes: 1. identification of the norm~ative beliefs about religious life and how they will likely shape the future of religious life in this country. 2. building a national data base of all male and female religious 8 Review for Religious that includes current demographic data, membership informa-tion, existing and emerging structures, current member atti-tudes on multiple dimensions, and projections for the future. enabling the leadership of religious orders to identify the current paradigms of effective management of transformation, consol-idation, merging, or extinction. labeling the changes that must yet occur if religious life is to remain a vital social and theological gift to the church into the next millennium. In this summary we hope to indicate how the lives of 121,000 religious are reflected in the opinions of the more than 10,000 religious priests, sisters, and brothers who took time to share their ideas and beliefs with us through personal interviews, ques-tionnaires, workshops, and written communications. We worked from several assumptions: that only religious can describe their experience of faith as religious; that the sociological data we gath-ered would serve them in their own self-direction; that without significant change religious life in the United States will continue to decline an, d, more important, that those who most need the help of religious will not be cared for; and that the generosity and self-sacrifice still present in the lives of religious must be articulated for others if they are to consider following Jesus in this manner. The study sought the broadest possible input from leader-ship, membership, and those with unique perspectives to offer. These latter were persons identified by their peers as possessing vision about the future of religious life and/or possessing notable caring attributes. This summary combines all the results and shows what, after all these scientific undertakings, we believe will make a difference to individual religious, to the various congre-gations, and to their ministry. II. Theoretical Perspective A. Transformation "Transformation" is perhaps most familiar to Christians in Paul's call to "be transformed into Christ," but the dramatic change undergone by religious orders and organizations has expanded the meaning to include organizational considerations. In the organizational realm it refers to qualitative, discontinuous shifts in members' shared understandings of the organization, accompanied by changes in the organization's mission, strategy, January-February 1993 9 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project and formal and informal structures. In contrast to simple and gradual changes, organizations undergoing tranoCormation come to understand themselves and their: .missioh very differently from their original understanding. Studies of transformation focus on one or another level at which .the change occurs: either the industry or the social insti-tution considered as a whole, or a particular organization, or a part of one (individual persons). In contrast, we investigated issues related to change in religious life on all three levels: Religious life as a whole (the social institution). This inves-tigation revealed that, while congregations may differ in their expression of religious life by virtue of gender or tradition (apostolic, monastic, mendicant, or contem-plative), all groups share broad-based beliefs, attitudes, and behaviors. ¯ The particular congregation (organization), namely, the 816 groups that participated in the survey. This survey investigated the shifting ways in which the groups expe-riencing transformation interpret a shared past, select value priorities, allocate resources, and assess mission opportunities. It also investigated the shifting metaphors and rituals which members use to express their beliefs and which draw them together with a shared sense of belonging. ¯ The individual (126,000 sisters, brothers, and priests). The study investigated the implications of transforma-tion for the individual members of religious congrega-tions. These three approaches enable a more complete understand-ing of how intercongregational, congregational, and individual experiences can affect each other and of how the various types of change can occur. A Model for the Process of Transformational Change Transformation usually begins with a crisis, an awareness that the understandings currently shared by the organization's mem-bers are no longer adequate. Several types of crisis may occur: performance may be poor, leadership transitions occur, some pow-erful subgroups' interests may no longer be served, management practices may no longer be successful, or, most typically, a major environmental shift may.confront the already existing interpretive schemes. The easiest response for the organization to take is to defend itself against the challenge and perhaps not to respond at 10 Review for Religious all. For transformation to begin, the experience of crisis must "unfreeze" the members' present understandings of the organi-zation by presenting a strong enough challenge to their validity. After unfreezing takes place or in conjunction with it, various individuals and groups begin developing alternative understand-ings. These lead to new types of action and most likely to changes in the structures of the organization. Moreover, the new types of actions that take place are likely to occur out-side the organization's traditional boundaries (for example, AT&T's work moved beyond telephones to include computers and other forms of communication as well); bound-aries are likely to break down. There is likely to be considerable conflict among the original and the developing interpretive schemes and the. subgroups espousing them. Groups that hold one particular new perspective, for example, are likely to find themselves in conflict with indi-viduals or groups that espouse the original perspective or a different new one. The conflict may take various forms: one perspective may clearly dominate various other perspectives and may stand aloof from them, or leaders may acknowledge the potential value of, and .thus encourage, interac-tion between several different perspectives. Leaders can have a strong impact on the outcome of the con-flict between perspectives. If they support only one perspective, they are likely to decrease the creativity of the transformational process and the active involvement of members whose perspectives are not taken into account. If they "separate out" the different perspectives, they are likely to perpetuate splits between the groups. If they enable conflicting perspectives to interact with each other, they will increase the chances of paradoxical trans-formations, of new and creative shared understandings that emerge from the interaction of the competing perspectives. The process of transformation is not affect-free. Rather, it is often paralyzing and disorienting and is experienced as a sequence In contrast to simple and gradual changes, organizations undergoing transformation come to understand themselves and their mission very differently from their original understanding. ~anuary-February 1993 11 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project of deaths and rebirths. Initially, various members' primary feelings are likely to include shock, defensiveness, loss, and anger. Throughout the development of new interpretive schemes, mem-bers will experience both ambiguity and confusion, not only when it is unclear that any satisfactory new understanding is develop-ing, but also when there are multiple potential perspectives. The conflict among subgroups will create additional tension. If and when a new synthesis is reached that people experience as acceptable, there is likely to be a sense of rightness and satisfac-tion, at least among members whose perspectives have been incor-porated. Summary Application of the Conceptual Model In this study we assume that religious life, congregations, and religious priests, brothers, and sisters are in the midst of a trans-formational process and that the new understandings of religious life held by significant numbers of members have not yet been fully developed. We also assume that the environmental change that most stimulated the transformation process was the new understandings of the church proclaimed during Vatican II and incorporated shortly afterward in documents directing religious congregations to begin the analysis and revision of their basic principles and practices. Presently, diverse, sometimes contradictory understandings of religious life have been developed among groups of religious. In addition, environmental forces that strongly support the devel-opment of particular understandings are present (for example, among the hierarchy and in various segments of the laity). How can the process to this point be best understood? What will hap-pen next in the transformational process? To what extent can leaders influence the transformation process? B. Levels of Change Change at the Level of the Social Institution The changes that have taken place generally in religious life have, of course, occurred in many different congregations. Schneiders's (1986) work describes a shared shift across many congregations--in the understanding of many of the components of religious life such as the vows and community. In addition, books suggesting that religious are meant to be "prophetic" or 12 Review for Religious "countercultural:' (for example, Woodward, 1987; Foley, 1988) are written to religi6us as a group, not to particular congrega-tions. Thus, the first level this study will consider is religious life as a shared entity across congregations. Shifts in understanding are frequently intertwined with shifts in structures, both formal and informal, and these structural shifts include not only new types of relationships and divisions among subgroups, but also the breakdown of formerly established orga-nizational boundaries. At the level of the universal church, Molinari and Gumpel (1987, p. 19) ask, "Is the consecrated way of life a structure in the church or a structure of the church?" The latter phrase implies only one structure of divine origin, namely the hierarchical one, while the former implies multiple divinely willed structures in the church. At the core of the dis-tinction is the degree to which the hierarchic structure governs the pneumatic components, the charismatic dimensions, of the church. Depending on the response to the question of one structure ¯ or many, structural diversity and change will occur in very dif-ferent ways. Many religious believe that their traditions repre-sent the pneumatic or charismatic dimension of the church that was evident in their founders and foundresses, and that these tra-ditions are better structured and controlled without the influence of the hierarchic structure. Areas for Investigation. In addition to the changes occurring within religious life in relation to the church, intercongregational structures have also been developing. We examined in a limited way intercongregatiofial changes such as mergers that are associ-ated with shifts in understanding or direction. What in particu-lar has happened to the boundaries separating religious from the diocesan clergy and from the laity? Change at the Level of lndividual Congregations Mthough some changes in understanding have been occur-ring across congregations in religious life as a "social institution," others have been occurring differently within different congre-gations. Moreover, many of the changes that have occurred across the board have been experienced by members of individual con-gregations as occurring within their own congregation more than in religious life as a whole. Thus, this study was concerned not only with changes in religious life generally, but also with changes occurring within specific congregations. .~anuary-Febrtmry 1993 13 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project For example, Bartunek (1984) described how the under-standing of the educational mission in one women's congregation shifted from the mid 1960s to the late 1970s. At the beginning of the change process, education was viewed as synonymous with activities that took place in schools the congregation adminis-tered. By the late 1970s, however, the educational mission was seen primarily as "seeking justice with the heart of an educator," which might or might not take place in formal educational set-tings, let alone schools the congregation administered. Beres and Musser (1987) have described how during that same period another congregation broadened its mission from particular areas of service to a general philosophy of service, with priorities shift-ing from the works of the congregation to the works of the con-gregation's individual members. Within religious congregations Nygren (1988) found that both male and female religious are adapting their structures and categories of membership to their emerging self-understanding. In a survey of 740 leaders of religious congregations, he found that 70% of the female leaders indicate that they are adapting their membership to include the full or partial membership of lay people. Among female congregations 18% of the total sur-veyed expect to amalgamate with another congregation, province, or monastery to adapt to internal changes. Correspondingly, 25 % of the male leaders anticipate altering membership categories, and 12% of them expect to amalgamate with another entity to adapt to change. These anticipated or accomplished changes affect both the existing members and the organization's self-definition. In one congregation studied by Bartunek (1984), members' shifts in understanding were intertwined with the development of several cross-province groups and commissions. They were also intertwined with the breakdown of formerly established exter-nal boundaries. Many congregational members started working with groups that had been clearly outside the original boundaries of the congregation. These structural changes eventually resulted in a merger of the U.S. provinces of the congregation. Areas for Investigation. How broadly applicable are the types of changes described above? What types of structural changes are occurring? What effects.do these changes have on the develop-ment of new understandings? Next, what are the processes through which new under-standings have be~n occurring? The model articulated above sug- 14 Review for Religious gests that change typically includes an initial experience of crisis, accompanied by strong feelings such as sadness, anger, and defen-siveness and followed by the development of differing under-standings on the part of various organizational subgroups. Feeli.ngs and reactions also accompany this stage: ambiguity and confu-sion about the possible understandings as well as conflict between groups. The introduction of the new Council of Major Superiors of Women Religious, for instance, introduces legitimacy to a divergent opinion among religious leadership. When a new syn-thesis is reached, a sense of rightness occurs. If it fails to occur, more destructive dynamics may characterize the group's func-tioning. In addition, from which elements of the environment do members of a particular congregation receive messages or con-straints regarding appropriate (or publicly appropriate) self-under-standing? In particular, how do the hierarchical church and the laity have an impact? How do intercongregational groups and networks affect the development of understandings within the congregations that belong to these groups? Next, how has leadership been affecting the experienced changes in religious life? The role of leadership has been ana-lyzed !n detail for an understanding of how leaders contribute to the development or decline of organizations. Change at the Level of Individual Members of Congregations It is clear ~hat changes have not left individual members untouched. For example, Ebaugh (1977) showed that the changes had strong effects on why members of women's religious con-gregations left the congregation. Others have indicated that one of the typical effects of a transformational process is an increase in the stress level of individual members. This is due to the ambi-guity that accompanies the change and to conflict between sub-groups. There should be more to the experience of individual reli-gious, however, than difficult feelings. Bartunek and Ringuest (1987) found that members of a particular congregation whose work took them across the congregation's original boundaries during the early 1970s, and who remained in their congregation, eventually came to perceive themselves as more influential in the congregation than did members who continued to carry out tra-ditional works. January-February 1993 15 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Thus, we are concerned not only with the change taking place on the congregational and intercongregational level, but also with the way various members of religious orders and particular sub-groups are experiencing the change. In addition, the differences between the experience of men and women religious may be rel-evant. We address two questions regarding this experience. Areas for Investigation. What has the experience of change been like for individual members of congregations? The model we have presented proposes that individual members of congrega-tions should experience a wide range of feelings during the change process. The departure of such a large percentage of religious has also had an impact on those who remain. Those who con-tinue to live the vocation to religious life surely have a unique perspective on their role and are rooted in a spirituality that sus-tains them. With this frame of transformation, then, we designed a .comprehensive assessment that could give us some measure of how change is occurring and affecting religious life at the level of the social institution, congregations, and individuals. III. Research Units The design of the Religious Life Futures Project contained six independent studies. They are described below. Figure 1 depicts the six research units, and a brief description of each unit follows. Figure 1 Religious Life Futures Project Research Units Hist/Theol Monograph Leadership S~udies Interview Survey Caring People Study Visioning Groups 16 Review for Religious The National Survey was a comprehensive questionnaire asking 9,999 religious sisters, brothers, and priests to express their beliefs and opinions about spirituality, motivation, services they provide, issues they consider to be negative or positive influences on the future of religious life, and various other matters of religious life in general and their orders in particular. The Leadership Studies were based on the recognition that leadership is a key factor in sustaining the life of any group. Investigations of leaders' views, of members' perceptions of their leaders, and of the competencies required ~or"~utstanding leadership were pursued in this research unit. The Caring People and Visioning Groups units of our project were constructed on the reason-able assumption that these subgroups could offer distinct perspectives. The caring people were identified by virtue of their exemplary car-ing for others, and participants, in the visioning-groups unit con-sisted of people nominated in virtue of their hopeful, positive, and compelling vision concerning the future of religious life. Individual Interviews, using a standard protocol, were pursued with persons identified as particularly knowledgeable about reli-gious life. These interviews probed for the interviewees' under-standings of the nature and purpose of religious life, of the challenges facing women and men religious at this time, and of the qualities required for leadership in the future. The Theological/Historical Monograph was commissioned to be written by Elizabeth Johnson CSJ, PhD, with a historical postscript by John W. Padberg SJ, PhD. Their material wi!l add perspective to the wealth of information collected, analyzed, and evaluated. The Religious Life Futures Project contained six independent studies. A. The National Survey Purpose and Method The purpose of the National Survey was to obtain informa-tion about members' attitudes and practices regarding religious life. Questions ranged from general demographics to patterns and attitudes about living arrangements and job satisfaction. The sur-vey also sought information regarding attitudes toward vows, var-ious aspects of religious life, spiritual growth, and future plans. .~anuary-Felrruary 1993 17 Nyffren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Early in 1990 each major superior in the United States was contacted by letter with a request for a list of the names and addresses of their members. From the more than 121,000 names received, a stratified random-sample design selected the partici-pants for the survey. This random sample was stratified to ensure statistically valid comparisons according to tradition (apostolic, contemplative, mendicant, monastic) and vocation (sisters, broth-ers, religious priests). The 335-item questionnaire was mailed in October 1990 to the 9,999 religious priests, brothers, and sisters selected in this manner. With postcard and phone follow-ups, an overall response of 77.4% (7,736 responses) was obtained. The data base used for reporting results consists of 6,359 usable surveys. In the data anal-ysis, the responses were weighted to reflect population proportions of sisters, brothers, and religious priests and of apostolic, mendi-cant, monastic, and contemplative groups. All data were analyzed according to age groups that would reflect developmental stages (ages 19-45, 46-60, 61-73, 74-96). Data Analysis and Results The questions throughout the survey represented a broad range of topic categories. Initial principal-components factor anal-yses were conducted on a select number of the items in the sur-vey. Separate factor analyses were conducted for vocation (sister, brother, priest), tradition (apostolic, mendicant, contemplative, and monastic), and age group (19-45, 46-60, 61-73, and 74-96). The results of these analyses, presented in terms of level of analysis and grouped in meaningful clusters, appear in Table 1. As indicated, four major clusters of factors emerged on the level of the Social Institution: structures, innovations, restraints, and cred-ibility. The clusters of factors are listed on the chart and will be defined and discussed below; summary findings, too, will be pre-sented on the following pages. Social Institution: Structures The National Survey factors related to Structures include role clarity, permanent commitment, external authority, systemic change, and hierarchical alliance. Because of the significance of role-clarity findings in this study, we present an extended discus-sion of this issue and then a summary of the other factors. 18 Review for Religious Categorization of Factors Derived from the Religious Life Futures Project Table 1 Social Institution Congregation Individual STRUCTURES Role Clarity Permanent Commitment External Authority Systemic Change Hierarchical Alliance INNOVATIONS Diversity Expanding Lay Roles Greater Inclusion RESTRAINTS Cultural Threats CREDIBILITY Commitment to the Poor Anomie LEADERSHIP ' Spiritual Intensity Charisma/Individual Consideration Intellectual Stimulation/ Inspirational Laissez-Faire Active Management by Exception Contingent Reward DYNAMICS Community Living Involvement Influence Ongoing Development GUIDANCE Procedural Clarity Effects of Renewal Support of Sponsored Institutions SPIRITUALITY Oneness with God Intensified Spirituality Structured Prayer BELONGING Congregational Commitment Affiliation Intention to Remain ACTION Faithfulness to Vows Works of Mercy Role Clarity. Role clarity for religious is defined as "the indi-vidual's perceived level of understanding regarding his or her pur-pose and function within the current structure of the church." On this measure 55% of the sisters reported high role clarity, along with 65% of the brothers and 68% of the priests. More than 30% of the women reported low role clarity, indicating a lack of understanding or clarity regarding their role in the church today. The discussion of leadership issues related to the National Survey may be found in the section which fbcuses exclusively on this topic. ffanuary-Felr~utry 1993 19 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Projea Considering the data by tradition, we find 77% of the con-templatives and 64% of the monastics reporting high role clarity while only 59% of the apostolic and mendicant religious indi-cated they have a clear understanding of their role. Role clarity may be proportionately greater in the future, for, while only 52% of the youngest members reported high role clarity, 71% of the oldest did so. This finding parallels research that finds in many professions greater role clarity among those who have been in the profession for a longer time. Interestingly, the more highly educated members of religious congregations experience lower role clarity as religious. In terms of the fields of study, religious in the more applied disciplines such as business, education, and health care were less clear about their role as religious in the church than religious whose training is in the more theoretical disciplines such as theology, the human-ities, and the social sciences. The role demands of health-care providers or educators may present pressures that replace or com-pete with, rather than complement, the current role of religious in the church. Other research has demonstrated that ambiguity regarding role can, in general, lead to anxiety, reduced ability to meet role requirements, decreased ministerial satisfaction, lower trust and self-confidence, increased sense of futility, and greater propen-sity to leave a religious order. The lack of role clarity that a high percentage of religious experience may contribute to still more decline in the numbers of religious. There may also be some con-nection between the equal number of women and men entering religious life now (in contrast to women's former, three-times-greater number) and the greater number of women now experi-encing low role clarity. Taken together, this data signals the essential need for role clarity if religious orders in the United States are to be revitalized. Permanent Commitment. In responding to questions related to the normativeness of a lifelong commitment for religious life, all groups (considered by vocation, by tradition, and by age) reg-istered barely moderate agreement. On a scale wher~ 1 repre-sents "strongly disagree," 3 represents "neither agree nor disagree," and 5 represents "strongly agree," the group means ran between 3.1 and 3.5 on the matter of their agreeme.nt that permanent commitment is the norm. External Authority. All respondents tended to disagree that 20 Review for Religious reliance on external authority would influence the future of reli-gious life favorably. There was a general rejection of seeking input regarding thought, opinion, or behavior from outside sources such as church or group authority, indicated by the fact that, on the five-point scale described above, means for all groups were between 2.5 and 3.1. Systemic Change. Sisters, brothers, and religious priests experienced little connection between their work for sys-temic change (defined as "efforts to influence the social and political struc-tures which tend to discriminate against disadvantaged persons") and their per-sonal and spiritual fulfilhnent. All means were greater than 3.0 and less than 3.4. This did not change when considered by age groups or tradition. Hierarchical Alliance. The cluster of items that reflect a positive relationship between the hierarchy and religious or a positive attitude regarding the church's hierarchy and magiste-rial authority was not typically rated highly by religious. The more highly educated members of religious congregations experience lower role clarity as religious. Social Institution: Innovations The National Survey included items measuring participants' responses to trends in religious life that introduce greater diver-sity into community living. Items inquired about the conscious inclusion of persons who have declared their homosexual orien-tation, about the comfort level of minority-group members as perceived by members-at-large, and about the impact of includ-ing lay associate members. Admitting Homosexual Persons. Survey participants were asked to respond to this statement: "Declaring a homosexual orientation would not exclude an individual from being admitted to my con-gregation." Sixty-four percent (64%) of all respondents indicated either agreement with the statement or uncertainty. Thirty-six percent (36%) disagreed. Considering the data by vocation, only 16% of sisters agreed with the statement, and nearly 50% expressed uncertainty. This was significantly different from the responses of religious priests and brothers. Agreement of religious priests registered at 43 %, January-February 1993 21 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project with 22% uncertain. Thirty-five percent (35%) of the brothers agreed, with 25% uncertain. Among the four traditions, 53% of contemplatives indicated disagreement, im:plying the least expectation that persons declar-ing a homosexual orientation would be admitted to their con-gregations. "Agree," "uncertain," and "disagree" percentages were rather evenly split among the other traditions. Among monastics the greatest percentage (39%) agreed. Thirty-eight percent (38%) of the members of apostolic groups (again the greatest percentage) indicated uncertainty regarding admission of candidates with a known homosexual orientation. Considering the data by age, 45% of the members under 45 expressed their belief that a person with a homosexual orientation would be admitted to their congregation. Forty-three percent (43 %) of the oldest age group felt that homosexual persons would not be admitted, and 46% of the same age group expressed their uncertainty. Members of Minority Groups. When asked to respond to this statement, "Members of minority groups may feel uneasy in my congregation," the sentiment among religious in general is fairly well split: 36% agree; 22% are uncertain, and 42% disagree. This response pattern reflected the response pattern of the sisters, the brothers, and the religious priests considered separately and also of the apostolic, the mendicant, and the monastic religious con-sidered separately. But 52 % of contemplatives disagreed with the statement, while 27% agreed. Analysis by age reveals the greatest differences. Fifty-two per-cent (52 %) of the youngest group and 44% of the next age group (46-60 years) indicated their belief that members of minority groups would feel uneasy. In contrast, half of the 61-to-73 age group and 53% of the oldest group did not believe minority-group members would feel uneasy in their orders. At present, less than 10% of the members of religious orders in the United States are members of minority groups even though, in the near future, 50% of the U.S. Catholic population will be Hispanic. The real-ity of multiculturalism must be addressed by religious orders. Lay Associates. In response to this statement, "Inclusion of lay associates as members of my congregation may undermine what it means to be a member of my congregation," only 16% of the respondents agreed; 65% clearly disagreed. Lay associates, includ-ing members of the opposite sex and married couples, appear to 22 Review for Religious have widespread acceptance among religious. In general, religious reported little concern about having lay associates as members of their congregation and about the effect their presence may have on the meaning of membership in it. Other Factors. When asked to rate the impact that expanded lay roles in church ministry, feminist thought, the ordination of women, and the inclusion of married persons would have on reli-gious communities, respondents of all groups consistently indi-cated their belief that these situations and possibilities would have little effect if any. Social Institution: Restraints Respondents were invited to rate (on a five-point Likert scale where 1 represents "not at all" and 5 represents "extremely") aspects of contemporary American culture such as capitalism, technology, and affluence in terms of their potential threat to the future of religious life. Data analysis by age and tradition shows that religious view them as minimal threats. Considering the data by vocation, sisters indicated a greater (but not high) concern regarding the impact of cultural realities than did brothers and religious priests. Social Institution: Credibility The "credibility" cluster consisted in working with the poor and anomie. Commitment to the Poor. To measure a member's stated com-mitment to work personally with the poor, survey participants were asked to respond to this statement: "Although there is in.creasing talk about working with the poor, I feel little commit-ment to that." Mean scores for all vocations, traditions, and age groups did not exceed 3.5. (Sisters, members of apostolic groups, and religious in the 19-45 age group yielded the highest means in their groupings.) Thus, members of congregations express little commitment to participate in an activity which has increasingly become a value espoused by many congregations and, quite explic-itly, by the church. These findings suggest that the greatest commitment to work with the poor would be found in a young sister in an apostolic congregation. This group currently shows the least tendency to increase in size. Anomie, defined as a state in which normative standards of January-Felrruary 1993 23 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Reli~ous Life Futures Project conduct and belief are weak or lacking, is characterized by dis-orientation, anxiety, and isolation. Loss of conviction about the vows, lack of clarity about the role of religious, reactance to authority, lack of a corporate mission and ministry, and disillu-sionment with leadership pose significant threats to the future of religious life. The mean scores for all groups were greater than 3.5. These concerns increased with age. Congregational Level." Leadership The National Survey used specifically designed items related to qualities of spiritual leadership along with Bass's leadership scale to assess members' perceptions of their leaders. So that all leadership studies may be reported together, these findings are incorporated into Section III B, Leadership. Congregational Level." Dynamics The National Survey .also measured several factors affecting community living, including involvement, influence, and satis-faction with opportunities for ongoing development. Involvement and Influence. Involvement is defined as "the expe-rience of having, and the desire to be engaged in, activities related to the life of one's congregation"; influence, as "the experience of having and the desire to have some impact regarding the deci-sions and future of one's congregation." On a scale where 1 rep-resents "strongly disagree" and 5 represents "strongly agree," agreement regarding involvement in congregational activities was high (ranging from 3.9 to 4.0.), with nearly the same means across the three vocations (sister, brother, religious priest). Levels of perceived influence wei-e significantly lower, with means ranging from 3.2 to 3.0. Vv-hen the factors of involvement and influence were considered by tradition, the range was the same. Considering the data by age, interesting patterns surfaced. The youngest group had the lowest mean for influence and the highest mean for involvement. The 74-96 age group, in contrast to the 19-45 group, had the highest mean for influence and the lowest for involvement. A consistent pattern did emerge: The members' perceived or desired level of influence in their congregation is consistently lower than their experience or desire of involvement in it. This raises serious questions that touch on group-commitment and ownership issues. 24 Review for Religious Ongoing Development. Respondents' satisfaction with oppor-tunities for ongoing development through education and forma-tion, rated on a scale of 1 ("very dissatisfied") to 5 ("very satisfied"), averaged about 4.0. In general, the high levels of sat-isfaction and the high expectations that possibly accompany that satisfaction may encounter significant frustrations or difficult choices when, as is likely in most congregations, they encounter decliriing revenue and personnel. Congregational Level: Guidance The National Survey also investigated the degree to which a congregation's policies and structures promote the effective func-tioning of the group. Procedural clarity, effects of the renewal process, and members' willingness to support sponsored institu-tions are the focal points for addressing this question. Procedural Clarity. Analyzed by vocation, tradition, and age, religious indicated a moderate level of satisfaction with the clar-ity of their congregation's policies, and procedures. The group means ranged from 3.5 to 3.9. With the scale ranging from 1 ("strongly disagree") to 5 ("strongly agree"), it is fair to say that members do not experience an.overwhelming sense of clarity con-cerning their congregation's policies and procedures. Effects of Renewal, Thirty years ago the Second Vatican Council directed religious orders to examine their structures and update themselves. A return to the spirit of the founder was identified as a critical part of this renewal process. Members' assessments of their congregation's efforts and success in remaining faithful to the founding charism or in maintaining the prophetic character of religious life reflect once again only a moderate level of agree-ment. Across age groups the highest rating (the mean was 3.8) reflected the assessment of the 61-to-73-year-olds. Significantly, this was the group that provided most of the leadership during the past 30 years. The youngest group expressed the lowest satisfac-tion. There were no differences between the various traditions in their ratings of the effectiveness of renewal efforts. Support of Sponsored Institutions. In an effort to assess the com-mitment of members to their congregation's institutional com-mitments, respondents were asked to indicate their willingness to work in an institution sponsored by their congregation and their willingness to live in such an institution. Overall, 93% of the religious responding to the survey January-February 1993 25 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project answered yes regarding their willingness to work there. This rep-resents 94% of the religious priests and brothers and 92% of the sisters who responded. A smaller but still sizable percentage (88%) indicated their willingness to live at an institution sponsored by the congregation; this figure represents 84% of the sisters, 91% of the brothers, and 92% of the priests. ~'hese results present the opportunity to leaders, congrega-tional planners, and institutional decision makers to consider the availability and willingness of members of religious organizations and to direct their efforts toward a corporate mission. The empha-si~ on individual ministries that has evolved in recent years may now be shifting or open to reconsideration by members. Individual Level: Spirituality Spirituality was considered in terms of the experience of a sense of oneness or harmony with God, the degree of increased spiritual intensity, and the value of structured prayer to personal and spiritual fulfillment. Oneness with God. M1 religious report a moderately high level of agreement on a five-point Likert-type scale (1 represents "not at all" and 5 represents "frequently if not always") to questions assessing a sense of oneness with God. Sisters and contempla-tives score highest. Not surprisingly, this sense appears to deepen with age insofar as mean scores for age groups increased as age increased. Intensified Spirituality. The survey also measured changes in spirituality in terms of the degree to which respondents reported finding greater value in religious life and having deeper belief in Jesus Christ and deeper appreciation of the value of prayer since the time of their first profession of vows. While sisters, contemplatives, and members of the 74-96 age group reported the greatest levels of intensified spirituality, the other groups reflected high levels. StTv~ctnred Prayer. The degree to which structured prayer ex~)e-riences such as common prayer, an annual retreat, confession, and devotion to Mary were reported to be a source of spiritual and personal fulfillment was also measured on a five-point scale. Considered by vocation (si~ters, brothers, priests), all resporidents registered agreement beyond a level of 4. I. Consistent with their tradition, contemplatives had the highest mean of the tradition groupings in reporting structured prayer to be a very valuable 26 Review for Religious contributor. The experience of structured prayer as spiritually and personally fulfilling increased with age. Individual Level'. Belonging The National Survey measured individuals' commitment to their congregation as well as affiliation and the intention to remain. Commitment to Congregation. All traditions, vocations, and age groups reported moderately high to very high levels of congre-gational commitment. Not surpris-ingly, levels of agreement steadily increased with the respondents' ages. Affiliation. As was the case for commitment to the congregation, all groups (vocation, tradition, and age) were strong in their agreement with items indicative of high affiliation. Sisters, contemplatives, and members of the oldest age group had the high-est means in their respective cate-gories. Intention to Remain. Members of all groups (considered by age, voca-tion, and tradition) expressed--at or beyond the 4.2 level on the five-point "strongly disagree/strongly agree" scale--agreement with items related to their intention to remain in their congregation. This high degree of durability may be viewed both as cause for celebration and as cause for concern. Religious women report chastity as most meaningful and least difficult, while men report chastity as most difficult and least meaningful. Individual Levek Actions The National Survey also measured respondents' manifesta-tion of belief through their fidelity to vows and works of mercy. Faithfulness to Vows. Self-ratings regarding faithfulness to their vows of poverty, chastity, and obedience, when analyzed by voca-tion, tradition, and age, ranged between 3.7 and 4.1. Because the purpose of this study was not to delve into the details of behav-iors of religious women and men as they relate to observance of their vows, the research asked only for individual self-reports of fidelity to each vow. Of greater concern in this investigation were those individual that were related to persons who do or do not perceive themselves as faithful. January-February 1993 27 Nyg~ren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Regarding practice of the vows, the researchers learned that religious women report chastity as most meaningful and least dif-ficult, while men report chastity as most difficult and least mean-ingful. In a ranking of difficulty, obedience emerges as more difficult for women than for men. Works of Mercy. The belief that direct action to help the sick or poor made a somewhat valuable contribution to their spiritual and personal fulfillment was registered most strongly by religious priests and sisters. Considering the data by tradition, members of the mendicant and apostolic groups reported that their practice of the works of mercy was somewhat valuable to their personal and spiritual fulfillment. Monastic religious experienced such works as less valuable, and contemplatives, perhaps as a function of their lifestyle, experienced them as least helpful. Factor Conclusions: Social Institution The social institution of religious life in the United States continues to reflect the dynamics of an organization in signifi-cant transition. The lack of role clarity for a large percentage of religious and the ambivalence regarding permanent commitment to the classic vows leave the social institution vulnerable to innu-merable other social and cultural forces. The results would indi-cate that the population of religious in general is moving toward a much more permeable system of membership, commitment, autonomy, and inclusion. While on the one hand this reinforces innovation that includes diversity and broadened assumptions about religious life, the research also indicates that religious do not see how clearly they are influenced by cultural assimilation. Likewise, the credibility of many religious may be lessened in the eyes of those they serve and in the society in which they func-tion because of the discrepancies between their espoused values and their practice. By their own admission, religious see indif-ference and a lack of passion to be a major threat to themselves as persons and to religious life overall in relation to other social sys-tems in society. Factor Conclusions: Congregation Leadership is a critical force for the clarification of the role identity of religious in the United States. Within congregations, 2 8 Review for Religious particularly among women, there exists a fair degree of satisfac-tion with leadership. The hidden side of the satisfaction is that it may signal complaisance among members who at the same time find it difficult to influence the direction of the congregation. For many, the congregation lacks a coherent approach to col-lective action, particularly regarding sponsored institu-tions. In addition, the efforts at renewal have not met indi-vidual hopes. Community life continues to engage mem-bers, and they feel deeply committed to congregational life, willing to be more involved than they currently are, but also feel less influen-tial with leadership in the matter of setting the direction of the congregation. The high need for affiliation noted in the survey results may, in fact, stifle the creativity necessary to move groups into the future. Leadership is a critical force for the clarification of the role identity of religious in the United States. Factor Conclusions: Individual A facet of the research that addresses optimistically the lack of role clarity for many religious is the data that suggests how important spirituality and a vital relationship with God really are for many of them. Structured prayer, however varied the forms, continues to be a value. Individuals feel genuinely called by God to religious life and see an intensified spirituality as desirable. They are personally committed strongly to the community, they derive satisfaction from belonging, and most intend to remain in religious life. It is fair to say that the data indicates a stronger ecclesiology than Christology. Individuals emphasize participation in the life of the church and community as foundational to their spirituality. Their relationship to the person of Christ is less clearly drawn, perhaps because of the design of the study itself or maybe because of shifting language schemes to describe one's spirituality. What is clear from the research is that their spirituality will define their uniqueness in the church and their belonging will satisfy their affiliative needs. January-February 1993 29 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project The data suggests also that, if religious experience difficulty, it has to do with the impact of the vows on their life and with their fidelity to the vows. The personal sacrifice that has been the foundation of the vowed life has found support in the effect it has had on the mission of the congregation and the church. Profound shifts have occurred in the interpretation of the vows and the willingness to live them. More fluid interpretations of poverty, obedience, and chastity are widely observed. In addition, some religious describe new vows--of ecology, for instance--as descriptive of the future. Personal understandings of religious life and the commitment required to live the life are very broad. This results in part from lack of role clarity and from the vast cultural shifts in American society that have had a significant influence on religious life. Most religious would see some return to normative behavior as neces-sary, but they are reluctant to do so if that means returning to the sect-like distinction of religious life of the past. B. Leadership The recognition and identification of leadership as a critical factor in the transformation of religious orders prompted the investigation of leadership from many perspectives. These included: 1. a series of regional gatherings attended by 192 leaders of religious congregations; 2. members'oat-large perceptions of their leaders through the National Survey; 3. a separate "Leadership-Competency Assessment of Leaders of Religious Orders" with personality psycholo-gist David McClelland PhD. One of the first issues to surface during the course of the Religious Life Futures Project was the urgency of selecting and training leaders who not only can manage the complexity of reli-gious life that is predicted to intensify during the next 10 years, but also can focus the attention of their communities on a vision that will unite individual efforts inspired by the mission of their founder or foundress. The most striking weakness among cur-rent leaders is their inability to formulate a strategy to achieve a purpose or mission. Also of concern was the increasingly widespread use of con- 30 Review for Religious sensual processes and team leadership. The findings indicate that, while potentially effective, such approaches can often lead to mediocre management, representing the least common denomi-nator within an organization. Uninformed implementation of consensual methods often paralyzes the visionary leader. Leadership Workshops At the Leadership Workshops the participants were asked to write, in the form of a letter to their members, their vision for the future of their congregation, of the people whom their congre-gation serves, and of religious life in general. A content analysis of these "letters" yielded four categories of leadership: Value-based leaders expressed a sense of direction for their con-gregations or themselves in terms of the conceptual and cultural aspects of religious life. They were able to give expression to their values, but were unable to ide.ntify strategies to actualize them. For example, the author of one letter expressed concern about the environment, but only vaguely proposed that the congregation become involved in recycling. A letter simply urging the eradi-cation of "oppressive structures" without any suggested imple-mentation illustrates another value stated without a strategy. Visionary leaders, on the other hand, expressed a sense of direc-tion in terms of the structural and organizational aspects of reli-gious. life. The articulation of a strategy to accomplish their vision marks the difference between visionary and value-based leaders. One of the letters, besides proposing a new form of community in which nonvowed members would participate in governance, named specific guidelines and thus coupled a vision with a strat-egy. Conflicted leaders were unable to address change and often expressed frustration, anger, sadness, and even despair. These feelings were frequently directed toward members of the con-gregations. One such leader wrote, "It seems to me that some of our religious are unconcerned. They seem to have lost the orig-inal enthusiasm for their religious calling. Life has become drudgery for them, and membership in our congregation is a bur-den. Nothing we do or try to do seems to change this picture, and it is of great concern to me." Incognizant leaders, those who are unconscious or unaware of major issues facing their orders, failed to address any of the con- January-Felrruary 1993 31 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project cerns facing their congregations or the church. For example, one leader wrote, "There is no secular history/profane history; there is only sacred history. God is present in everything and in all. God journeys with us, with all people. God is the force, the life, the purpose behind everything and everyone." The researchers note that, while God is ultimately the means and the end of reli-gious life and leadership itself, incognizant leaders do not realize their role in enabling the action of God. From these workshops, the researchers concluded that there is often a gulf between the responsibilities of the office and the abilities some leaders bring to it. In many cases, leaders lack the necessary competencies or training to function effectively. Members' Perceptions of Leadership from the National Survey The National Survey measured members' perceptions of their leaders, using a measure of leaders' spiritual intensity and Bass's transformational and transactional leadership scales. The spiri-tual intensity of their leaders is rated highly by both men and wbmen. Both female and male religious expressed a slighdy higher degree of satisfaction with individual leaders than with leader-ship teams. Women were generally more satisfied with their lead-ership than men were. The survey measured the degree to which members viewed their leaders as transformational and transactional. Transforma-tional leaders provide vision and a sense of mission while instill-ing pride and gaining respect and trust. Transactional leaders focus on administrative and operational details. Typically, trans-actional leaders orient subordinates toward achieving goals by monitoring their performance, rewarding their accomplishments, and taking corrective action when necessary. Sometimes they abdicate responsibilities and avoid decision making. Both women and men tend to consider their leaders to be transformational people who embody charisma and individual consideration as well as intellectual stimulation and inspiration. On a scale where 1 represents "almost never" and 5 represents "frequently if not always," sisters' mean ratings of their leaders on charisma and intellectual stimulation were 3.67 and 3.57, respec-tively. Conversely, male religious consistently rate their leaders higher on transactional qualities, contingent reward (brothers' mean was 1.78; priests' mean was 1.70) and active management by exception (brothers' mean was 2.38; priests' mean was.2.26), than 32 Review.for Religious do female religious (contingent-reward mean was 1.62; manage-ment- by-exception mean was 2.06). The findings showed that, while spiritual intensity was the most frequently observed behavior of all outstanding leaders, charisma or individual consideration of members was the most significant predictor of satisfaction with an individual leader or a leadership team. Leadership Competency Study This research unit assessed systematically the competencies required for outstanding leadership. The model of competency assessment developed by McClelland and associates at McBer & Co. was employed. It began with the convening of a panel of experts to assist in identifying a criterion group of 24 present or former leaders of religious congregations regarded by their peers as "outstanding." Using the "Behavioral Event Interview" (BEI) method also devel-oped by McClelland, the research team interviewed this group of 12 women and 12 men. Similar interviews were conducted with a control group of 15 "typical" leaders (11 women and 4 men) matched with the criterion group for age, gender, tradition, size of congregation, and length of tenure. These interviews were then transcribed and coded by two separate raters for leadership competencies. Analysis of the data revealed that outstanding and typical lead-ers share certain "threshold competencies," including an ability to articulate the mission of their congregations, an inclination to act efficiently, basic conceptual and analytical skills, self-confi-dence, and avoidance of impulsive or emotional expression. These can be regarded as foundational competencies for leaders of reli-gious orders. Outstanding leaders, however, were found to differ from typ-ical leaders in several significant ways. For instance, outstanding leaders expressed, nearly three times as often as did typical lead-ers, a desire to perform tasks well or better than they had been performed in the past. They stated more than twice as often as typical leaders that they wanted to find new ways to achieve goals and to make things better for the people their order serves. Approximately 65% of the outstanding leaders mentioned taking initiative to deal with anticipated problems at least five times. Only 22 % of typical leaders referred that often to taking such actions. January-February 1993 33 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Outstanding male leaders are more likely to start projects dealing with problems anticipated in the coming years than are typical male leaders and female leaders in general. The study also found that outstanding leaders were signifi-cantly more likely than typical leaders to mention using their power to influence group decisions or behavior; to build consen-sus and team spirit by soliciting the views of others; to attempt to see issues from different perspectives; and to draw on divine assis-tance in their leadership roles. Conversely, typical leaders were more inclined than outstand-ing leaders to mention that they had threatened sanctions to control the behavior of subordinates; had acted out of formal authority, not by building consensus; and had involved themselves with the per-sonal problems of individual mem-bers as opposed to the problems of the entire congregation. Typical leaders seldom refer to God in their leadership activity. The study' also found differ-ences between outstanding men and outstanding women leaders. Outstanding men appeared more likely than outstanding wo~nen to have begun new projects; to have acted assertively; to have offered more opinion, s, particularly negative ones, to subordi-nates; to have developed the leadership capacity of others; and to have experienced the benefit of God's support. The outstanding women, on the other hand, appeared more likely to have focused on consensus building; to have pointed to the spiritual significance of events; and to have positive expecta-tions of others and of religious life in general. The leadership-competency assessment revealed that out-standing male leaders are more likely to start projects dealing with problems anticipated in the coming years than are typical male leaders and female leaders in general. Neither ?utstanding nor typical female leaders appear to initiate such projects. While all male leaders report more behavior that threatens members with termination of an assignment or with dismissal from a con-gregation than do female leaders, this is strikingly true of typical male leaders. Outstanding female leaders behave in this manner more frequently than their typical counterparts. This suggests the desirability of a moderate use of sanctions. 34 Review for Religious C. Visioning Groups Recognizing that various groups of members could offer distinct perspectives, the study was to include the views of persons who could provide specifically clear opinions regarding the future of religious orders. Individuals identified as future oriented yet rooted in their order's charism were invited to participate in one of four Visioning Groups. This research unit was conducted through a series of weekend gatherings. The aim was to learn about the personality characteristics and beliefs of the individu-als and to develop strategies and agendas that could implement the visionaries' images of the future of religious life. Their prospec-tive views would also be compared with those of both leaders and members-at-large of religious orders. Selection of Participants Subjects for the Visioning Groups were recruited through a nomination process that began with a letter sent to the major superiors of 550 randomly selected congregations. The superi-ors were asked to consult with their councils, similar groups of advisors, or members-at-large to nominate one member of their order to participate in a group experience. Criteria for selection asked that the nominee be a person of vision who is recognized for his or her ability to live the charism of the congregation in today's society and that the nominee be able to articulate a sense of hope and a belief in the future of religious life. A total of 92 religious-- 48 women and 44 men (12 brothers and 32 priests)--participated in the Visioning Groups' gatherings. "The Dilemma": Affiliation vs. Transformation One of the most significant findings of the Visioning Group workshops emerged from an exercise conducted during the course of each gathering. Participants were organized randomly into groups of three or four people and given the task of identifying those elements critical to the future of religious life. After a period of private reflection, participants were asked to gather in their assigned groups and share the results of their reflections. Each of these groups then joined another, resulting in groups of 6 to 8. They continued the conversation and were then asked to con-struct an image or metaphor that captured visually and graphically the components they considered essential to a future vision of religious life. The results of their work included such images as a January-February 1993 35 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project kaleidoscope, a prism, a jazz band, a symphony orchestra, and the spiral of unitive consciousness. After all groups in a session had ~'eported and presented their images of the future of religious life, each person was asked to consider all the models and to stand near the one he or she found most compelling in terms of a future vision. Participants were asked to base their choice on their willingness to make a personal commitment and to devote their energy to realizing that future vision. This request invariably created a dilemma for the partici-pants. Preferring a model designed by another group produced in most individuals a sense of guilt, of betrayal and abandonment of the group with which they had worked to produce an image. This process replicated the dilemma which many members of congregations experience in wanting to be involved in actualizing a compelling vision of the future, but desiring also to maintain existing relational bonds. While this sense of loyalty or affilia-tion that inhibits change is not unique to religious groups, it does represent a critical factor in groups moving toward changing the future. Affiliation is generally stronger than vision. This tension is particularly important to consider in light of the National Survey's finding that members of religious orders experience a particularly high need for affiliation. This dynamic is an important challenge for religious leaders. Visioning Groups Conclusions: Social Institution Revitalized religious life, rooted in Jesus Christ and the gospel's values, will manifest that spirit in the world by challeng-ing systems that oppress others, by living in visible simplicity, and by renewing congregations' fidelity to their founding pur-pose. The visioning groups view authority as power that is shared among communities of equals. This perception, however, may level the traditional notions of the vow of obedience and bring more democratic ideals into the classical traditions of religious life. Viewing the global community as the locus of redemption, sisters, brothers, and religious priests will face alterations in prayer, expanding their language for a greater inclusivity. They will choose to share in the world's suffering and will shift away from the rigidity of regional and juridical thinking. Members of reli- 36 Review for Religious gious orders will express their relationship with Jesus in the con-text of belonging, in shared symbolic life, and possibly in a shift in primary language. The dominant language of religious life has shifted from theological constructs to social and psychological paradigms. Many religious no longer use sacramental or tran-scendental frames of reference to describe their experience of God. Multiculturalism as normative is desirable, but confronting the personal and systemic racism that marks our society and reli-gious orders could be the single greatest challenge in the area of membership. Conclusions: Congregation Religious congregations ought to provide opportunities for structural expressions of emerging forms of religious life. To do so, they will have to discern the contemporary expression of their founder's charism, redefine or reestablish boundaries for mem-bership and behavior, and confront the discrepancies between espoused and lived values. The images (discussed above) of a future vision of religious life that were constructed by small teams were efforts to isolate and highlight a particular manifestation of a charism, not as an end in itself but to show a possible direction for the congregation to move in. At present, such efforts to regain the founding spirit are often viewed by the majority of members as marginal. When those who may have the vision are pressured to conform to the group, revitalization may be undermined. Conclusions: Individual Individuals within religious orders will shift from an internal to a global focus. They will need to acquire new interpersonal skills and an ability to cope with moving from stability and secu-rity to change and risk that lead to a more clearly focused mission. Challenging a culture that has supported privatism and indi-vidualism, members of religious congregations will need to reex-amine nonnegotiables. Relinquishing many previously held tenets, they will respond to the call of serving absolute human need in the spirit of their founder. New members must demonstrate the maturity to live a life of sacrifice, must possess or acquire the skills for leadership posi- .~anuary-Fetrruary 1993 37 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Reh~ious Life Futures Project tions in global and church communities, and must be able to sus-tain intimate relationships in the context of a celibate commit-ment. Current members, too, who continue to belong to religious congregations will need these skills and qualities and must prepare to live in communities that require them. D. Caring People The Caring People unit studied the characteristics of persons identified by members of their congregations as "uniquely car-ing" or "unusually helpful, thoughtful, understanding, or caring persons." All selected subjects received mailed packets that included a cover letter, a six-picture story exercise (projective technique), the National Survey questionnaire, and a variety of open-ended and short-answer measures. Because traditional question-and-answer research does not easily permit the study of unconscious motives, open-ended (projective) techniques were used to study the motive structures of these persons. This approach was espe-cially important because much research about traits and behavior typically depends on self-reports which introduce the possibility of bias in the direction of socially acceptable responses. In other words, what might have been measured in other studies was the need for consistency of self-image, not necessarily the subject's willingness to go to the assistance of a needy person. By coding responses to some open-ended questions, we were able to con-struct a profile of caring people. Findings The Caring People study found that, in contrast to typical religious, religious who are perceived as unusually helpful, under-standing, and caring feel closer to and more trusting of God, who is seen as the source of healing and care. On projective measures, caring religious score higher in trust and lower in mistrust than typical sisters, brothers, and priests and tend to portray authority as benevolent. Caring religious con-nect divine assistance, in contrast to individual effort, with heal-ing experiences. They are less self-controlling and more spontaneously inclined to generosity. Caring people state that they often find the experience of contemplative prayer very valuable. They also demonstrate a 3 8 Review for Religious greater interpersonal involvement in caring experiences. Caring religious describe these relationships as growing and mutual and as containing a wider meaning or significance beyond the imme-diate relationship. Finally, these religious experience more joy in caring and more zest for living. This contrasts with typical religious, who describe caring for others in tension-reduction terms. That is, typical religious report their caring as a response to a need in themselves such as caring out of duty or as a repayment, or car-ing in response to special needs such as the illness, rejection, or trauma of other people. Presence of God This research suggests that, for caring religious, helping is not simply a transaction between two people. There is a third force in the relationship that .might most generally be called a "benevolent authority" or, more simply, God. The caring reli-gious stays in close touch with God and wants to share this behev-olent authority with others. When encountering a person in need, the goal of the caring religious is not primarily to relieve his or her suffering, but to create a three-way relationship in which Jesus and the gospel's values are deeply involved. Helpers of this type do not see themselves as agents in the process; at most they are partners with or assistants to the real source of helping. They do not feel ultimately responsible. For this reason and also because the helping is in itself joyous, caring religious do not as readily "burn out." This description also explains why caring religious who are so motivated are perceived to be helpful rather than manipulative. Because they so obviously believe that of themselves they can do nothing and because they want to establish a mutually rewarding i'elationship, caring religious are not perceived as egoistically threatening the self-esteem, interpersonal power, or indepen-dence of others. To the extent that responding to absolute human need is embraced anew as the ultimate mission of religious congrega-tions, the formation and development of this motive for religious life is clearly essential. Caring People Conclusions: Social Institution This part of the research effort assumes that a fundamental ffanuary-Felrruary 1993 39 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project component of the role identity of religious is their call to care for others. It also assumes the motive of desire for oneness with God. Perhaps the future of religious life will be defined increas-ingly by these attributes or actions on behalf of others that medi-ate the presence of God. Caring religious live an operative Christology that is simultaneously immanent and transcendent. Conclusions: Congregation The Caring People study suggests that the heart of congre-gational life is the life of Jesus Christ in the gospel. The imme-diacy of the presence of the caring person to another is possible because of this effort to mediate God, whom they see as a benev-olent authority and the source of their action. Conclusions: Individual The focus of individual formation must be increasingly spir-itual. This research would indicate that those who learn to be authentically caring are inclined spontaneously to generosity, are trusting, and are aware that God acts in and through them. This level of freedom requires viewing God as a benevolent authority in whose name one acts as mediator. E. Individual Interviews Using a standard protocol developed for use in the Individual Interviews phase of the study, the researchers 15robed persons identified as particularly cognizant and understanding of religious life's nature and purpose and of the challenges now facing women and men religious and identified, too, as having the qualities required for leadership in the future. The purpose of this por-tion of the study was to verify the beliefs of members-at-large about the nature and purpose of religious life and its mission, about emerging forms and structures, and about future directions and to compare these beliefs with those surfacing in other forums. Conclusions: Social Institution Interviewees noted that the mission of Jesus will be the cen-tral focus and that the spirituality of congregations will be rooted 40 Review for Religious in their charism. Driven by pressing social and ecclesial needs, charity and justice will be the focus of mission and ministry, and most apostolic community life will be in proximity to the poor. Although a clear church identity will be maintained, the struc-tures of religious life will be based on mission rather than canons, and the unique charism of religious life will remain largely distinct from hierarchical functions. An inclusive atmosphere will be marked by multiculturalism, a clear inclusion of women and the feminine, and a genuine respect for diversity. Perhaps the most striking discrepancy in the portrait of the future of the social institution of religious life that emerges from the Visioning Groups, the National Survey, and the Individual Interviews involves commitment to the poor. The random sam-ple of members reveals at most a moderate commitment to par-ticipate in an activity which has become increasing!y a mission espoused by many religiou~ orders and quite explicitly by the church. Conclusions: Congregation Some of several changes in congregational living could strengthen the religious orders of the future. Specifically, inter-viewees indicate that religious community life will be marked increasingly by the intentionality of sha~ed values, purpose, and resources. Some congregations whose charisms are similar will merge, the number of apostolic groups will decrease, and many groups will become smaller. Because their members report greater clarity of focus and mission, membership in monastic orders may increase. The ranks of religious orders will be marked by older mem-bers, with few younger members and many second-career entrants. New congregations, though few, will contribute to the revital-ization of religious life. Religious congregations must examine the impact of what has often been an uncritical introduction of associational and affilia-tional forms of membership. This will entail a focus on the mean-ing of membership and in many cases the reestablishment of boundaries. Congregations that are vital to the church will have an explicit focus, and their effectiveness will be enhanced by the members' commitment to the collective mission. January-February 1993 41 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Conclusions: Individual In the view of those who participated in the interviews, com-mitment to works of mercy is critical. Most individuals who belong to religious orders were motivated at the outset by their impulse to generosity and are sustained by their special relation-ship with God. By serving those with absolute human need, sis-ters, brothers, and religious priests will dedicate themselves to a high-cost, high-commitment life in communities that can be wit-nesses to Jesus Christ and the gospel. E Historical/Theological Monograph Because it is important also to understand the findings of the study from both historical and theological perspectives, the researchers commissioned a theological/historical monograph. Elizabeth Johnson CSJ, PhD, of Fordham University, will write a theological monograph focusing on religious life since the Second Vatican Council. John W. Padberg SJ, PhD, of Saint Louis University, will provide a historical postscript to her work. This work, projected for completion in 1993, will add perspective to the wealth of information collected, analyzed, and evaluated in this research effort. IV. Conclusions:Shaping the Future of Religious Life If religious life is to continue to be a vital force in the church and the world, the FORUS study concludes that dramatic changes must occur in most religious congregations in the United States. Fidelity to the spirit of the founder and responsiveness to critical and unmet human needs are basic to the ongoing mission of reli-gious communities. Yet, while individual examples abound, only in limited ways have religious acted collectively to address absolute human needs, new forms of poverty, and demands that seemingly outstrip the capacity of any group to respond. Vatican II called religious to a return to the "spirit of the founder." While most congregations have engaged in much study and have made great efforts to move in this direction, the absence of corporate commitment to meeting currently unmet needs in the light of gospel imperatives stands in contrast to the collective vision and action inspired by God that marked the birth of most apostolic, monastic, and contemplative congregations. Religious 42 Revieva for Religious life as a social institution in United States society is at a crossroads. To achieve a desired future, religious as a group as well as indi-viduals must confront the forces that currently restrain them and reinforce the dynamics that will allow them to be in fact respon-sive to absolute human need in accord with their particular charism. A future marked by significant revitalization will emerge for congregations that--in union with God, in fidelity to their founding purpose, and in response to absolute human need--confront the current gap between the gospel and the culture. The research concludes with an equation of sorts, depicted in Figure 2 below, that can be applied to all con-gregational traditions in vary-ing degrees. The interaction of eight critical factors in the context of personal and collec-tive conversion will move con-gregations from their current states to their desired futures. The research also concludes that for other groups the The absence of corporate commitment to meeting currently unmet needs in the light of gospel imperatives stands in contrast to the collective vision and action inspired by God that marked the birth of most apostolic, monastic, and contemplative congregations. restraints on advancement are severe and may lead to decline. What follows is a brief summary of the conclusions drawn from the various facets of the study. 1. Individualism and Vocation Since Vatican II, shifting paradigms of vocation and con-comitant cultural trends have deemphasized the distinctiveness of the religious life. The research suggests that the personal call to holiness given to all Christians in Lumen Gentium did in fact impact religious life and the understanding of the religious life. Religious feel somewhat ambivalent about their current state while at the same time celebrating the advances of the laity in the church since Vatican II. The age of experimentation in the church paral-leled vast cultural shifts in kanerican society towards individualism, cultural assimilation, and the democratization of all authority. ~anuary-February 1993 43 Nygren and Ukeritis ¯ Religious Life Futures Project Figure 2 Shaping the Future of Religious Life in the US Restraining Forces ~ lndividualisrn]~ ~Average Loadershipl_~ Aut"orit V'i

0ARTIKELPERJANJIAN PENYIARAN IKLAN PADA RADIOHARAU FM DI KABUPATEN 50 KOTAOleh :AZARI AFRIANDI0910012111094Program Kekhususan HukumPerdataFAKULTAS HUKUMUNIVERSITAS BUNGHATTAPADANG201311PERJANJIAN PENYIARAN IKLAN PADA RADIO HARAU FM DIKABUPATEN 50 KOTAAzari Afriandi1, As Suhaiti Arief1, Yanzalsizastry11Jurusan Ilmu Hukum, Fakultas Hukum Universitas Bung HattaEmail: Azr_Ryan@yahoo.comAbstractTo expand its promotional advertising company doing activities with an agreement with oneof the radio. In In the agreement there is a possibility of broadcasting the event of default.Based on the above description that be the problem that is the birth of broadcasting agreementHarau ads on FM radio in the District 50 City, the rights and obligations of the parties to theagreement Harau advertisements on FM radio in the District 50 City, default and its solutionin the form of broadcasting agreement Harau ads on FM radio in the District 50 City. Theresearch method used is a socio-juridical. This study is descriptive and qualitative dataanalysis, using primary data source and secondary data, as well as interview techniques anddata collection study documents. Based on the research results it can be concluded that is thebirth of broadcasting agreement Harau ads on FM radio in District 50 consists of thesubmission of the City of broadcasting and manufacturing agreements advertisements,implementation of rights and obligations in the agreement Harau advertisements on FM radioin the District 50 City generally are appropriate with the agreement, but there is also someagreement that has not been in accordance with an agreement, but there is also someagreement that has not been in accordance with an agreement, in the form of defaultagreement Harau advertisements on FM Radio City District 50 meet performance butconfused ie, meet the performance, but it's too late and did not meet the performance at all.Default on this ad broadcasting agreement resolved not by law but by deliberation stripbetween the two sides.Key words : agreement, advertising, radioPendahuluanKeberhasilan produsen dalammenghasilkan produk membuat tingkatpersaingan usaha semakin tinggi sehinggauntuk memasarkan produknya perludilakukan promosi. Untuk itu diperlukanmedia massa dalam menjalankanfungsinya sebagai salah satu saranapromosi. Promosi oleh Pasal 1 angka 6Undang Undang Nomor 8 Tahun 1999tentang perlindungan Konsumendidefinisikan sebagai kegiatan pengenalanatau penyebarluasan informasi suatubarang dan / atau jasa untuk menarikminat beli konsumen terhadap barang dan/ atau jasa yang akan dan sedangdiperdagangkan.Banyak cara yang ditempuh olehsuatu perusahaan untuk mempromosikansuatu produk yang ingin disampaikankepada konsumen, salah satunya adalahiklan, yang merupakan bagian pentingdari suatu pemasaran produk. Iklansebagai sarana pemasaran oleh suatuperusahaan bisa dilakukan dengan carayang paling sederhana dan ada juga2pemasangan iklan yang memerlukanpersiapan panjang dan dana yang tidaksedikit. Iklan sederhana bisa dilakukanoleh suatu perusahaan misalnya adalahdengan membuat materi iklan sepertiselebaran, poster, iklan radio, brosur.Sedangkan bentuk pemasangan iklan yangmembutuhkan persiapan panjang dan danarelatif besar misalnya iklan di televisi.Radio merupakan mediakomunikasi massa yang mempunyai peranpenting dalam kehidupan sosial, budaya,politik dan ekonomi. Oleh karena itu radioharus memiliki kebebasan dan tanggungjawab dalam menjalankan fungsinyasebagai media informasi, pendidikan,hiburan, serta kontrol dan perekat sosial.Radio sebagai salah satu mediakomunikasi yang akrab denganmasyarakat adalah salah satu media yangdimanfaatkan perusahaan untukmempromosikan produknya, yaitu denganmemasang iklan di radio. Jika ingin suatuproduk dipasarkan dalam cakupan daerahyang tidak terlalu luas atau pemasarandengan lokasi yang relatif sempit makaradio bisa menjadi alternatif pilihan yangmenarik para produsen yang inginmempromosikan produknya kepadamasyarakat atau konsumen.Dengan banyaknya fungsi dariradio tersebut, maka sudah seharusnyadapat bersaing dengan media massa lainuntuk memperoleh peran yang kuat dimasyarakat. Kelebihan radio dari mediamassa lain yaitu setiap pendengar radiotidak harus berada di depan radio untukmendengarkan siaran radio, seperti halnyatelevisi yang harus didepan layar gunamendapatkan beragam informasi, radiobisa didengar sambil melakukan pekerjaanlainnya seperti memasak, membaca koranatau menyetrika. Jadi tidak membutuhkanwaktu khusus atau waktu tersendiri untukmendengarkan radio. Bila sebelumnyaradio bertumpu pada fungsi utama yaituberita, kini mulai meningkat paling sedikitmempunyai lima fungsi yaitu hiburan,informasi dan penerapan, pendidikan,jurnalistik dan komersil. Konsekuensi dariperkembangan tersebut menuntut radiomengembangkan dan meningkatkankinerja secara profesional untukdisesuaikan dengan dinamika publik yangdilayani dalam sajian hiburan danpendidikan.Perjanjian pemasangan iklanantara produsen dan radio terlebih dahuludi awali langkahnya dengan negoisasiharga untuk penyiaran iklan tersebut.Harga tersebut tentu saja meliputi berapadurasi atau panjang iklan, periode ataujangka waktu iklan tersebut disiarkan,frekuensi penyiaran iklan tersebut setiaphari, dan juga masalah materi iklan.Negoisasi antara pemasang iklan danpihak radio jika sudah tercapai katasepakat, maka keduanya akan terikat3dalam bentuk perjanjian. Perjanjian itusendiri adalah perbuatan hukum antaradua pihak atau lebih berdasarkan katasepakat untuk menimbulkan akibathukum, yaitu adanya hak dan kewajibanyang mengikat untuk ditaati oleh parapihak.Pasal 1313 KUHPerdatamenyebutkan "suatu perjanjian adalahsuatu perbuatan dengan mana satu orangatau lebih mengikatkan dirinya terhadapsatu orang lain atau lebih". Mengacu padaPasal 1313 KUHPerdata, dapat dikatakanbahwa dalam sebuah perjanjian terdapatsatu orang atau lebih yang mengikatkandirinya terhadap satu orang atau lebih.Pasal 1338 ayat (1) KUHPerdatamenyatakan "semua perjanjian yangdibuat secara sah berlaku sebagai undangundangbagi mereka yang membuatnya"artinya pihak-pihak yang mengikatkan diripada perjanjian tersebut, terikat padaperjanjian yang mereka buat yang apabiladilanggar sama artinya dengan melanggarundang-undang.Sesuai dengan ketentuan ini makapelaksanaan perjanjian penyiaran iklanyang diadakan oleh pihak produsen danpihak radio, adalah mengikat danmerupakan undang-undang bagi keduabelah pihak. Jadi pada saat para pihaksudah mencapai kata sepakat danmenandatangani suatu perjanjian, makaperjanjian itu akan mengikat bagi parapihak untuk melaksanakan isi perjanjiantersebut. Pihak radio, dalam hal ini sepertipada Radio Harau FM Kabupaten 50 Kotaakan menyiarkan iklan berdasarkankesepakatan, dan di pihak lain, produsenyaitu pengiklan harus memberikanimbalan prestasi sesuai dengan perjanjian.Dalam hal pelaksanaan perjanjianpenyiaran iklan ini, tidak tertutupkemungkinan adanya kelalaian dankesengajaan dari salah satu pihak yangmenimbulkan wanprestasi. Atau lebihtepatnya di sebabkan oleh kendalakendalayang membuat salah satu pihaktidak memenuhi prestasi yangdiperjanjikan. Wanprestasi yangdilakukan oleh salah satu pihak dalamperjanjian dapat menimbulkan kerugianpada pihak lain, oleh karena itu, pihakyang dirugikan perlu mendapatperlindungan hukum.Berdasarkan uraian latar belakang diatas, maka dapatlah dirumuskan apa yangmenjadi permasalahan sebagai berikut:1. Bagaimanakah proses lahirnyaperjanjian penyiaran iklan pada radioHarau FM di Kabupaten 50 Kota?2. Bagaimanakah hak dan kewajibanpara pihak dalam perjanjianpenyiaran iklan pada Radio HarauFM di Kabupaten 50 Kota?3. Bagaimanakah bentuk wanprestasidan penyelesaiannya dalam perjanjian4penyiaran iklan pada raio Harau FMdi Kabupaten 50 Kota?Berdasarkan rumusan masalah,maka penelitian ini dilakukan dengantujuan sebagai berikut:1. Untuk mengetahui proses lahirnyaperjanjian penyiaran iklan pada radioHarau FM di Kabupaten 50 Kota.2. Untuk mengetahui hak dan kewajibanpara pihak dalam pelaksanaanperjanjian penyiaran iklan pada radioHarau FM di Kabupaten 50 Kota.3. Untuk mengetahui bentukwanprestasi dan penyelesaianyadalam pelaksanaan perjanjianpenyiaran iklan pada radio Harau FMdi Kabupaten 50 Kota.MetodologiDalam penelitian ini penelitimelakukan pendekatan yuridis sosiologisyakni suatu penelitian yang data dasarnyadiperoleh dari penelitian lapangan untukmemperoleh data primer.Berdasarkan jenis penelitian yangpenulis ambil, maka sifat dari penelitianini adalah deskriptif yaitu penelitian yanghasilnya mengambarkan secaramenyeluruh dan sistematis mengenaiperjanjian perjanjian iklan pada RadioHarau FM Kabupaten 50 Kota.Dalam penelitian ini penulismenggunakan 2 (dua) sumber data, yaitu:1. Data PrimerData primer adalah data yangdiperoleh langsung dari penelitian dilapangan dengan melakukanwawancara dengan responden daninforman. Adapun yang menjadiresponden dalam penelitian ini antaralain :a. Pimpinan Toko Bunda Dealermotor Honda Payakumbuh,Bapak Budi Kurnia.b. Pemilik King Flora Lestari,usaha bibit dan tanaman hiasPayakumbuh, Bapak Erinal.c. Pemilik Klinik PengobatanAlternatif Khusus Mata,Payakumbuh, Bapak Marlon.d. Pimpinan CV. Emperor Motor,Dealer Motor BajajPayakumbuh, Bapak StevanOka.e. Kepala bagian iklan Radio HarauKabupaten 50 Kota, Ibuk CianaCasanova Parlianf. Pemilik CV. Dufe Brother, usahaperabot rumah tangga dan kantor,Bapak Dedy Arisandi.Sedangkan yang menjadi informanantara lain :a. Direktur/penanggung jawab RadioHarau FM Kabupaten 50 Kota,Bapak Yuzermin.5b. Kepala siaran dan administrasiRadio Harau Kabupaten 50 Kota,Ibuk Daira Suraswatic. Progammer dan kepala produksiRadio Harau Kabupaten 50 Kota,Bapak Ym. Dallu Awartha2. Data SekunderData sekunder adalah data yangberasal dari bahan-bahan pustaka yangterdiri dari bahan hukum primer,bahan hukum sekunder, bahan hukumtersier :a. Bahan hukum primer yangdigunakan yakni1) Kitab Undang UndangHukum Perdata ( KUHPerdata )2) Undang Undang Nomor 32Tahun 2002 tentangPenyiaranb. Bahan hukum sekunder adalahbahan-bahan hukum yang erathubungannya dengan bahanhukum primer yang dapatmembantu menganalisa danmemahami bahan-bahan hukumprimer yang berkaitan denganpenelitian ini, seperti : bukubukuatau literatur mengenaiperjanjian, jurnal-jurnal hukum,dokumen-dokumen tentangperjanjian-perjanjian penyiaraniklan radio.c. Bahan hukum tersier adalahbahan-bahan yang memberikaninformasi, petunjuk, sertapenjelasan terhadap bahanhukum primer dan sekunderseperti kamus hukum,ensiklopedia dan bahan lainyang ada hubungannya denganpenulisan ini.Data yang diperlukan dalampenelitian ini dikumpulkan melalui cara:1. Studi KepustakaanStudi kepustakaan dilakukandengan mempelajari buku-buku,peraturan perundangan-undangan danberkas-berkas yang ada di radioHarau FM Kabupaten 50 Kota sepertisurat kontrak perjanjian kerjasamaradio Harau FM Kabupaten 50 Kotadengan beberapa perusahaaan.2. WawancaraUntuk menjawab permasalahan yangditeliti, maka wawancara dilakukandengan langsung memberikanpertanyaan kepada responden daninforman, dimana dalam melakukanwawancara tersebut berpedomanpada pertanyaan yang berbentukterbuka sebagai alat pengumpul data.Setelah data dikumpulkan darilapangan dengan lengkap, maka tahapberikutnya adalah penarikan sampel danmenganalisa data.61. Metode Penarikan SampelPada penulisaan skripsi ini,teknik yang digunakan dalampenarikan sampel adalah secarapurposive sampling, yaitumenentukan secara langsung tentangresponden mana yang dapat mewakilipopulasinya. Pada tahun 2012terdapat 40 pengiklan bermasalahdan cukup besar, maka penulismengambil 5 (12,5 % dari populasi)sampel, yakni :a. Toko Bunda Dealer motor Honda,Payakumbuh.b. King Flora Lestari, usaha bibitdan tanaman hias, Payakumbuh.c. Klinik Pengobatan AlternatifKhusus Mata, Payakumbuh.d. CV. Emperor Motor, DealerMotor Bajaj, Payakumbuh.e. CV. Dufe Brother, usaha perabotrumah tangga dan kantor,Payakumbuh2. Analisa data dilakukan secarakualitatif yaitu dari data yangdiperoleh kemudian disusun secarasistematis berdasarkan permasalahanyang diteliti dan dianalisa untukmencapai kejelasan masalah yangdibahas lalu disimpulkan dan diuraikan dalam bentuk kalimat.Hasil dan PembahasanBerdasarkan wawancara penulisdengan ibu Daira Suraswati (Kepala Siarandan Administrasi Radio Harau FM) bahwaproses lahirnya perjanjian dapat diuraikansebagai berikut :1. Pengajuan Penyiaran IklanPengajuan perjanjian penyiaraniklan pada umumnya dilakukan olehpihak calon pengiklan dengan caramenghubungi atau datang langsungke studio Radio Harau FM Kabupaten50 Kota. Namun terkadang pengajuanini bisa juga dilakukan oleh pihakRadio Harau FM dengan cara"jemput bola" atau menghubungilangsung calon pengiklan untukpenawaran.Untuk dapat mengajukanpermohonan perjanjian penyiaraniklan, pihak calon pengiklan harusmemenuhi syarat-syarat sebagaiberikut :a. Fotokopi tanda pengenalb. Proposal kegiatan, apabila halyang diajukan menyangkutpenyelenggaraan acara.c. Deskripsi umum tentang profil halyang ingin diiklankan. Hal inidibutuhkan untuk konsep iklanyang akan dikerjakan oleh radio.Apabila produk yang akandiiklankan sudah mempunyaikonsep iklan sendiri dari pihak7pengiklan, pihak radio tidak perlumembuat konsep lagi sehinggahanya merekam materi iklan saja.2. Pembuatan Perjanjian Penyiaran IklanPerjanjian penyiaran iklan padaRadio Harau FM dapat dilakukandengan bentuk tertulis atau dalambentuk tidak tertulis. Dalam bentuktertulis pihak Radio Harau FM lazimmenyebutnya dengan Media Orderatau Kontrak pemasangan. Adapun isiperjanjian penyiaran iklan dalambentuk tertulis meliputi nama iklan,periode penyiaran, jumlah spot, biayakontrak serta tanda tangan keduabelah pihak. Dalam perjanjian jugadibunyikan bahwa iklan akandisiarkan apabila telah dilakukanpembayaran baik itu secara tunai ataumencicil setiap bulannya. Padaperjanjian yang dilakukan dalambentuk tidak tertulis, para pihakmenggunakan asas konsesualismeyaitu asas yang menyatakan bahwaperjanjian pada umumnya tidakdiadakan secara formal, tetapi cukupdengan adanya kesepakatan keduabelah pihak. Pada prakteknyaperjanjian yang dilakukan dalambentuk tidak tertulis pada RadioHarau FM, cukup dilakukan denganmenelpon pihak Radio Harau FMoleh pengiklan yang ingin memasangiklan di Radio Harau. Walaupundilakukan dalam bentuk tidak tertulis,namun pihak Radio Harau FM selalumempunyai catatan khusus bagi pihakpengiklan yang hanya melakukanperjanjian penyiaran iklan melaluitelpon. Namun hal ini menjadi suatukelemahan bagi Radio Harau FMkarna tidak dibuat secara tertulismenimbulkan kesulitan bagi pihakRadio Harau FM apabila sewaktuwaktupihak pengiklan wanprestasi.Pada perjanjian penyiaran iklan padaRadio Harau FM, baik pihak RadioHarau FM maupun pihak pengiklanmasing-masing mempunyai hak dankewajiban. Adapun hak dan kewajibantersebut yaitu :1. Hak pihak Radio Harau FMHak dari Radio Harau FM jugamerupakan kewajiban yang harusdilaksanakan bagi pihak pengiklan,yaitu :a. Berhak menerima pembayaransesuai dengan kesepakatan, yaknipembayaran uang tunai atau barangatas iklan yang disiarkan.b. Menerima bahan-bahan / materiiklan dari pihak pengiklan2. Kewajiban pihak Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 KotaKewajaiban dari Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 Kota merupakan hak8yang harus diterima oleh pihakpengiklan.a. Memproduksi iklan sesuaikebutuhan promosi pengiklanb. Memperdengarkan hasil iklanyang telah diproduksi kepadapihak pengiklan sebelumdisiarkan.c. Melaksanakan penyiaran iklandengan baik sesuai denganperjanjian yang disepakatid. Membuat dan menyerahkanlaporan penyiaran iklan yangsudah dilaksanakan.Dalam pelaksanaaan penyiaran iklanpada Radio Harau FM Kabupaten 50 Kotatidak tertutup kemungkinan adanyawanprestasi yang di lakukan salah satupihak. Berdasarkan wawancara yangdilakukan dengan bagian kepala iklanRadio Harau FM Kabupaten 50 Kota danpihak pengiklan, bentuk-bentukwanprestasi yang terjadi yakni :1. Memenuhi prestasi tetapi keliruSalah satu contoh wanprestasi inidilakukan pihak Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 Kota, yaitu tidak sesuainyapengucapan konten iklan dan kualitasmixing iklan yang disiarkan dengan seleradan kebutuhan pengiklan. Wanprestasi inidiselesaikan dengan cara memproduksiulang iklan tanpa pihak pengiklan harusmembayar kembali pada pihak radioHarau FM.2. Memenuhi prestasi, tetapi tidak tepatwaktunya.Berdasarkan wawancara penulisdengan ibu Ciana Cassanova Parlian(Kepala Bagian Iklan Produk Radio HarauFM) keterlambatan pembayaran olehbeberapa pengiklan pada umumnya terjadipada perjanjian tidak tertulis. Bila terjadiketerlambatan tetap harus dibayar denganuang atau barang tanpa dikenai dengandenda.3. Sama sekali tidak memenuhi prestasiSalah satu contoh wanprestasi dengansama sekali tidak membayar iklandilakukan oleh perusahaan CV. EmperorMotor, Dealer Motor bajaj. AdanyaWanprestasi yang dilakukan pihak CV.Emperor Motor, Dealer Motor Bajajdengan sama sekali tidak membayar atasiklan yang telah disiarkan. Dalampenyelesaian wanprestasi ini pihak radioHarau FM hanya memaafkan dan tidakmembawa ke jalur hukum karena pihakperusahaan sudah tutup operasional.Kesimpulan1. Proses lahirnya perjanjian penyiaraniklan pada radio Harau FM Kabupaten50 Kota terdiri dari pengajuanpenyiaran iklan yang dilakukan olehpihak calon pengiklan dengan caramenghubungi atau datang langsung ke9studio Radio Harau FM. Pada tahappengajuan umumnya terjadi negosiasisebagai tindakan pendahuluan untukmelakukan perjanjian, kemudian tahapterakhir barulah dilakukan pembuatanperjanjian baik itu secara tertulismaupun tidak tertulis.2. Perjanjian penyiaran iklan inimenimbulkan hak dan kewajiban bagipara pihak yaitu :a. Hak pihak Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 KotaHak tersebut merupakankewajiban yang harusdilaksanakan oleh pihakpengiklan.1) Berhak menerima pembayaransesuai dengan kesepakatan,yakni pembayaran uangtunai/barang atas iklan yangdisiarkan.2) Menerima bahan-bahan iklandari pihak pengiklanb. Kewajiban pihak Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 Kota1) Membuat dan memproduksiiklan sesuai kebutuhanpromosi pengiklan2) Memperlihatkan ataumemperdengarkan hasil iklanyang telah diproduksi kepadapihak pengiklan sebelumdisiarkan.3) Melaksanakan penyiaran iklandengan baik sesuai denganperjanjian yang disepakati.4) Membuat dan menyerahkanlaporan penyiaran iklan yangsudah dilaksanakan.3. Bentuk wanprestasi dan carapenyelesaiannya dalam perjanjianpenyiaran iklan pada Radio Harau FMkabupaten 50 Kota yakni :a. Memenuhi prestasi, tetapi keliruSalah satu contoh dilakukanoleh pihak Radio Harau FMKabupaten 50 Kota yaitu tidaksesuainya pengucapan konten iklandan kualitas mixing iklan yangdisiarkan dengan selera dankebutuhan pengiklan.b. Memenuhi prestasi, tetapi tidaktepat pada waktunya, contohnyaadanya keterlambatan dalampembayaran iklan yang telahdisiarkanc. Tidak memenuhi prestasi samasekali contohnya tidak dibayarsama sekali atas iklan yang telahdisiarkan.Ucapan Terima KasihPenulis mengucapkan terima kasihkepada Ibu As Suhaiti Arief, S.H., M.H.selaku Pembimbing I dan IbuYanzalsizastry, S.H., M.H., selaku10pembimbing II dan pihak-pihak yangterkait lainnya yaitu :1. Ibu Dwi Astuti Palupi, S.H., M.H.,selaku Dekan Fakultas HukumUniversitas Bung Hatta Padang.2. Ibu Nurbeti, S.H., M.H., selaku WakilDekan Fakultas Hukum UniversitasBung Hatta Padang.3. Bapak Adri S.H., M.H., selaku KetuaBagian Hukum Perdata FakultasHukum Universitas Bung HattaPadang.4. Kepada seluruh Bapak dan Ibu DosenFakultas Hukum Universitas BungHatta Padang yang telah memberikanilmu dan mendidik penulis selamaduduk di bangku perkuliahan.5. Kepada Staf Administrasi (BagianTata Usaha) Fakultas HukumUniversitas Bung Hatta, yang banyakmembantu penulis dalam pengurusandokumentasi dan administrasi untukkelancaran dalam menyelsesaikanskripsi ini.6. Kepada kedua orangtua penulis yangtelah mendidik penulis dengan kasihsayang yang tulus, ikhlas dan jugakepada kedua adik-adik penulis yangtelah memberi dukungan hinggaseperti saat ini.7. Bagian Administrasi KesatuanBangsa Dan Politik Padang(Kesbangpol), yang telah membantupenulis dalam urusan administrasiuntuk kelancaran dalammenyelesaikan skripsi ini.8. Kepada Direktur dan seluruh penyiarRadio Harau FM, khususnya BapakYm. Dallu Awartha yang telahmembantu penulis pada saatpenelitian sehingga dapat berjalandengan lancar.Daftar PustakaAbdul Kadir Muhammad, 1994, HukumPerikatan, Bandung : Citra AdityaBaktiDepartemen pendidikan dan Kebudayaan,1997, Kamus Besar BahasaIndonesia, Jakarta : Balai Pustaka.J. Satrio, 1995, Hukum Perikatan,Perikatan yang Lahir dariPerjanjian, Bandung : PT. CitraAditya BaktiR. Setiawan, 1987, Pokok-PokokPerikatan, Bandung : Bina CiptaR. Soebekti, 1997, Hukum Perjanjian,Jakarta : Intermasa., 1985, Pokok-pokok HukumPerdata, Intermassa : JakartaSalim H.S, 2003, Pengantar HukumPerdata Tertulis (BW), Jakarta :Sinar Grafika.S. M. Niken Restaty, PengantarPeriklanan, Jakarta, Fakultas IlmuKomunikasi, UniversitasMercubuanaSoerjono Soekanto, 1984, PengantarPenelitian Hukum, Jakarta :UIPress11Wirdjono Prodjodikoro, 1985, Asas-asasHukum Perjanjian, Bandung :Bale.Kitab Undang Undang Hukum PerdataUndang Undang Nomor 32 Tahun 2002tentang Penyiaranhttp://digilib.petra.ac.id, Iklan, diaksestanggal 10 Oktober 2012http://unixlifes.blogspot.com/2011/09/pengertiandefinisiadvertisingperiklanan.html. diakses tanggal 26november 2012http://www.wikipedia.org.diakses tanggal27 november 2012http://menwih hukum.blogspot.com/2009.diakses tanggal 7 desember 2012http://dwibrilianita.blogspot.com/2012/02/perjanjian periklanan.html. diakses27 November 2012http://www.jurnalhukum.com/cakapmelakukan-perbuatan-hukum.diakses 11 Desember 2012Regieranjana.blogspot.com/2012/11/pengertian-iklan.html.diakse 20Februari 2013www.sarjanaku.com/2012/12/pengertianiklan-definisi.html.diakses 20Februari 2013Wartawarga.gunadarma.ac.id/2011/12/pengaruh-iklan-terhadap-penjualanproduk.Diakses 20 Februari 2013

Batı Afrika'nın ekonomik büyümesini hızlandırmak ve Euro'nun tek bir para birliği olarak elde ettiği başarı, Batı Afrika Devletleri Ekonomik Topluluğu'na (ECOWAS) üye devletler için ortak bir para birimi olarak hizmet etmek üzere "eko" önermesine ilham verdi. Bu tez, önerilen para birimi Birliğini ve yaratılmasının bölgenin ekonomik büyümesini nasıl etkileyeceğini inceledi. Tez, para birliği teorileri doğrultusunda betimsel bir istatistiksel analiz uygulamış ve aynı zamanda ortak bir para birliğinin öncü olan Avrupa da dikkate alınmıştır. Üye ülkeler arasında GSYİH, enflasyon oranı, faiz oranı ve ticaretler arası para birliği tesis eden faktörler göz önünde bulundurulmuştur. Şu ana kadar bazı ülkeler düşük enflasyon, düşük faiz ve döviz kuru gibi bazı yakınsama kriterleri elde edebilmişlerdir. Bir para birliği alanı oluşturmak için gereken ekonomik eğilimleri ve diğer kriterleri inceledikten sonra, Batı Afrika Devletleri Ekonomik Topluluğu önerilen eko para birliğiyle devam etmemeli ve mevcut dengesizlikleri gidermek için döviz kurunu, ticaret gelişimini, ve ayrica para birliğinin parasal egemenliğini ele geçirmeye çalışan Fransa meselesini dikkate almalıdır.to me İÇİNDEKİLER Teşekkür…………………………………………………………………………………………i Özet ………………………………………………………………………………………….….ii Özet …………………………………………………………………………………………….iii Şekiller Listesi………………………………………………………………………………….ix Tablolar Listesi ………………………………………………………………………………….xi Önsöz ………………………………………………………………………………………….xvi BÖLÜM 1 ……………………………………………………………………………………….6 1. Giriş ……………………………………………………………………………………….….1 1.1 Arka Plan …………………………………………………………………………………….1 1.2 Problemin Açıklaması ………………………………………………………………….…….2 1.3 Araştırma Hedefleri …………………………………………………………………….……3 1.4 Araştırma Hipotezi ……………………………………………………………………….….5 1.5 Analiz Yaklaşımı………………………………………………………………………….….5 BÖLÜM 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………….6 2.1 Optımum Para Alanı …………………………………………………………………………6 2.1.1 R. Mundell'in Perspektifi …………………………………………………………….……8 2.1.2 R.I. McKinnon'in Perspektifi ……………………………………………………….……10 2.1.3 Y.Ishiyama'in Perspektifi………………………………………………………………….11 2.1.4 Y.Ishiyama'nın Perspektifi …………………………………………….………………….13 2.1.5 G.S. Tavlas'ın Optimum Para Birliğinin 'Yeni' Teorisine Bakış Açısı………………. 25 2.2 Avrupa Birliği ……………………………………………………………… . ……….28 2.2.1 AB Tarihi …………………………………………………………………………………27 2.2.2 Maastrıcht Anlaşması……………………………………………………………………. 33 2.2.3 Avrupa Para Sistemi Krizi………………………………………………………………. 35 2.2.4 Neden Bazı Ülkeler Euro Kullanmıyor?. 36 2.2.5 Euro'nin Avantajları………………………………………………………………………37 2.2.5.1 Çeşitli Makroekonomik Faydalar …………………………………………………….37 2.2.5.2 Döviz Kuru İstikrarı……………………………………………………………………. 37 2.2.5.3 Daha Düşük Faiz Oranı………………………………………………………………….37 2.2.5.4 Yatırım ve Ticaret……………………………………………………………………….39 2.2.5.5 Uluslararası Para Birimi Olarak Hizmet Etmek………………………………………. 39 2.2.5.3 Daha Düşük Faiz Oranı………………………………………………………………….39 2.2.5.6 AB'de İstikrar, Hareketlilik ve Büyüme……………………………………………….39 2.2.5.7 Şeffaf ve Demokratik Kurumların Oluşturulması,……………………………………. 39 2.2.5.8 Ticareti Geliştirme, İnsani Yardım, Diplomasi ve Güvenlik…………………………. 40 2.2.6. Euro dezavantajları……………………………………………………………………….41 2.2.6.1 Teminat Para Birimi Olarak Euro…………………………………………………….41 2.2.6.2 Bazı Ülkeleri Avantajlı Bir Konumda Yerleştirmek…………………………………. 41 2.2.6.3 Avrupa İçi Ticaretin Düşüşü…………………………………………………………….42 2.2.6.4 Transfer Ödemelerindeki Düzensizlikler……………………………………………….43 2.2.6.5 Euro'nun Maliye Politikasını Kullanamaması………………………………………….43 2.2.6.6 Finansal İstikrarsızlık………………………………………………………………….44 2.2.7 Avrupa Bir Optımum Para Alanı mı?. 44 2.2.7.1 Enflasyon ……………………………………………………………………………….44 2.2.7.2. Döviz Kuru …………………………………………………………………………….46 2.2.7.3 Ticarette Açıklık………………………………………………………………………. 47 2.2.7.4 Ücretler ve Fiyat Esnekliği……………………………………………………………. 52 2.2.7.5 İşgücü Hareketliliği (Euro)……………………………………………………………. 53 2.2.7.6 Seçilmiş Euro Bölgesi Ülkelerinde GSYH'nin Payı Olarak Cari Açıklar…………….54 2.2.7.7 Seçilmiş Euro Bölgesi Ülkelerinde İşsizlik Oranları……………………………………54 2.2.8 Avrupa Birliğinde Dört Özgürlük……………………………………………………….55 2.2.8.1 Malların Serbest Dolaşımı………………………………………………………………55 2.2.8.2 Hizmetlerin Serbest Dolaşımı………………………………………………………….56 2.2.8.3 Euro Bölgesinde İşçilerin Serbest Dolaşımı…………………………………………….57 2.2.8.4 Sermayenin Serbest Dolaşımı 57 2.3 BATI AFRİKA DEVLETLERİ EKONOMİK TOPLULUĞU (ECOWAS)………………59 2.3.1 ECOWAS'a Genel Bakış………………………………………………………………….59 2.3.2 ECOWAS'nin Amaçları ve Hedefleri…………………………………………………….62 2.3.3 ECOWAS ün Temel Prensipleri………………………………………………………….64 2.3.4 ECOWAS'in İşlevleri…………………………………………………………………….65 2.3.5 ECOWAS'nın Başarıları………………………………………………………………….66 2.3.5.1 Siyasi İşler, Barış ve Güvenlik………………………………………………………….67 2.3.5.2 Gine Bissau'de Ekova'nın Rolü………………………………………………………….67 2.3.5.3 Fildişi Sahili'nde ECOWAS'ın Rolü…………………………………………………….68 2.3.5.4 Mali'de ECOWAS'ın Rolü………………………………………………………………69 2.3.5.5 Liberya'da ECOWAS'ın Rolü………………………………………………………….71 2.3.5.6 ECOWAS Yakınsama Konseyi Tarafından Makroekonomik Yakınsama Raporunun Kabulü……………………………………………………………………………………………73 2.3.5.7 ECOWAS Para Enstitüsü'nün kurulması (EMI).……………………………………….74 2.3.5.8 Tüm Devlet Mali İşlemlerinin Geçmiş Kayıtlarının Tutulması İçin Bir Kılavuzun Sağlanması . . .74 2.3.5.9 Sahel Bölgesinde Bölgesel Güvenliği Artırmak İçin Bir Eylem Planının Uygulanması.75 2.3.5.10 Tekdüzen Ticaret Geliştirme Stratejisine Giriş ………………………… …………….75 2.3.5.11 Ekonomik Kalkınma Belgesinin İmzalanması…………………………………………76 2.3.5.12 Ortak bir Dış Tarife Oluşturmak ……………………………. …………… ………….76 2.3.5.13 ECOWAS vatandaşlarının Bölgesel Güvenliği Artırmak ve Serbest Dolaşımını Kolaylaştırmak için Biyometrik Kart Tanıtımı………………………………………………….76 2.3.5.14 Sınır Yönetiminde Kılavuz Olarak Hizmet Verecek Bir El Kitabının Sağlanması……77 2.3.5.15 Ecolink 78 adlı Bölgesel Bağlantı Projesinin Başlatılması……………………………78 2.3.5.16 Tüm Finansal İşlemlerin Kaydını Tutmak için Entegre Finansal Yönetim Sisteminin Başlatılması . . .78 2.3.5.17 Üye Devletlerde Kalkınma için Çevre Yönetişimini, Genel Çevre Korumasını, Kapasite Oluşturmayı ve Sürdürülebilir Kaynak Yönetimini Geliştirmeye Yönelik Yenilenen Çabalar…79 2.3.5.18 Seme-Krake Ortak Sınır Karakolu İnşaatı Sözleşmesinin Yeniden İmzalanması (Benin - Nijerya)………………………………………………………………………………………….79 2.3.5.19 Nijerya ile Kamerun Arasındaki Bemenda Yolu ve Bir Joınt Sınır Karakolu (JBP) ve Mfum Sınırında Bir Sınırın İnşası……………………………………………………………….79 2.3.5.20 Batı Afrika Doğalgaz Boru Hattı Şebekesi Fizibilite Çalışması Sonuçlandı………….80 2.3.5.21 Düzenleyici ve Ekonomik Ortamın Düzenlenmesi İle Bölgesel Elektrik Piyasasının Gelişimi………………………………………………………………………………………….80 2.3.5.22 Yenilenebilir Enerji ve Enerji Verimliliği Teknolojileri ve Hizmetlerinin Teşviki….80 2.3.5.23 ECOWAS Üye Devletinde Enerji Verimliliği Binalarını Teşvik Etmeyi Amaçlayan Enerji Verimliliği Binası (EEB) Üzerine Bir ECOWAS Direktifi Ecree Tarafından Geliştirildi.81 2.3.5.24 Bölgesel Hastalık Merkezinin Kurulması…………………………………………….81 2.3.5.25 Bölgesel Güvenliği Güçlendirmek İçin Bir Eylem Planının Hazırlanması……………81 2.3.5.26 Ortak Pazar, Ticaret Liberalizasyon Şeması (TIS) ve Kişilerin, Malların ve Hizmetlerin Serbest Dolaşımı Protokolünün Uygulanmasının Konsolide Edilmesi………………………….81 2.3.5.27 Dakar-Abidjan Koridoru İçin Yardımcı Kanunun İmzalanması ve Bölgesel Elektrik Projesi için İlk Taşın Döşenmesi. Proje Cote D'ivoire, Gine, Liberya ve Sierra Leone'yi kapsıyor ……………………………………………………………………………………………………81 2.3.5.28 Abidjan-Lagos Koridor Otoyolu Uygulama Birimi……………………………………83 2.3.6. ECOWAS'ün Zorlukları………………………………………………………….………83 2.3.6.1 Ticaret Faktörü ve Üye Devletlerin Ekonomisi…………………………………………83 2.3.6.2 Mali Sektör Eşitsizlikleri ve Kötü Ödeme Sistemi…………………………………….84 2.3.6.3 Altyapı ve Düzenleyici Rejimin Zorlukları…………………………………………….84 2.3.6.4 Siyasi İrade Eksikliği……………………………………………………………………85 2.3.6.5 Yolsuzluk ve Siyasi İstikrarsızlık……………………………………………………….86 2.3.6.6 Koloni Aşılamasından Kaynaklanan Zorluklar…………………………………………86 2.3.7 EKO PARA BİRLİĞİNİN……………………………………………………………….87 2.3.8 FRANSA VS. ECO……………………………………………………………………….89 2.3.9 ECOWAS EKONOMİK GÖRÜNÜM……………………………………………………90 2.3.9.1 GSYİH………………………………………………………………………………….90 2.3.9.1.1 ECOWAS Bütçe Fazlası (+) Veya Açığı (-)………………………………………….92 2.3.9.2 Enflasyon……………………………………………………………………………….93 2.3.9.3 Faiz Oranı……………………………………………………………………………….94 2.3.9.4 Döviz Kurları……………………………………………………………………………96 2.3.9.5 Ticaret………………………………………………………………………………….97 2.3.9.6 Ecowas İstihdam Durumu…………………………………………………………….104 2.3.9.6.1 İstihdam………………………………………………………………………………104 2.3.9.6.2 İşsizlik……………………………………………………………………………….106 2.3.10 Eko ve Optimum Para Alanı……………………………………………………………107 3.BÖLÜM…………………………………………………………………………………….109 3. SONUÇ VE POLİTİKA ÖNERİLERİ…………………………………………………….109 REFERANSLAR………………………………………………………………………………112 --- In an attempt to accelerate the economic growth of West Africa, and the success made by the euro as a single currency inspired the Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS) to propose "the eco" to serve as a common currency for member states. This thesis looked into the proposed currency Union and how its creation will impact on the economic growth of the region. The thesis applied a descriptive statistical analysis in line with the theories of the currency union, and also Europe being the pioneer of a common currency was also taken into consideration. Factors for establishing a currency union such as GDP, inflation rate, interest rate, and inter-trade between member countries were considered. So far, some countries have been able to achieve some convergence criteria like low inflation, low interest and exchange rate. After reviewing the economic trends and other criteria needed for establishing a currency union area, the Economic Community of West African States should not proceed with the proposed eco currency and should consider the exchange rate and trade development to remove the imbalances that exist and also should address the issue of France who is trying to hijack the monetary sovereignty of the currency. CONTENTSAcknowledgementsiAbstractiiÖzetiiiList Of FiguresixList Of TablesxiiPrefacexviiCHAPTER 171.Introductioni1.1 Background 11.2 Statement of the Problem 21.3 Research Objectives 31.4 Research Hypothesis 51.5 Analysis Approach 5CHAPTER 262.1Optımum Currency Area62.1.1 Perspective of R. Mundell……………………………………………………………….82.1.1 Perspective of R. I. McKinnon…………………………………………………….……102.1.1 Perspective of Kenan: An Electic View.…………………………………………………112.1.4 Perspective of Y.Ishiyama 132.1.5 Perspective of G.S. Tavlas On The 'New' Theory Of Optimum Currency Union 252.2 The European Union……………………………………………………………….……….282.2.1 History of the EU 282.2.2 The Maastrıcht Treaty 332.2.3 The European Monetary System Crisis 352.2.4 Why Some Countries are not Using Euro? 362.2.5 Advantages of Euro 372.2.5.1 Diverse Macroeconomic Benefıts 372.2.5.2 Exchange Rate Stability 372.2.5.3 Lower Interest Rate 372.2.5.4 Investment and Trade 392.2.5.5 Serving as an International Currency 392.2.5.3 Lower Interest Rate 392.2.5.6 Stability, Mobilıty And Growth Within the EU 392.2.5.7 Establishment of Transparent and Democratic Institutions 392.2.5.8 Trade Promotion, Humanitarian Aid, Diplomacy and Security 402.2.6. Disadvantages of the Euro 412.2.6.1 Euro As A Fiduciary Currency 412.2.6.2 Placing Some Countries in an Advantaged Position 412.2.6.3 The Decline of Intra-European Trade 422.2.6.4 Irregularities in Transfer Payments 432.2.6.5 Failure of the Euro to the use of Fiscal Policy 432.2.6.6 Financial Instability 442.2.7 Is Europe An Optımum Currency Area? 442.2.7.1 Inflation 442.2.7.2. Exchange Rate 462.2.7.3 Trade Openess 472.2.7.4 Wages And Price Flexibility 522.2.7.5 Labour Mobılıty (Euro) 532.2.7.6 Current Account Deficits as a Share of GDP in Selected Euro Area Countries 542.2.7.7 Unemployment Rates in Selected Euro Area Countrıes 542.2.8 Four Freedoms in the European Union 552.2.8.1 Free Movement of Goods 552.2.8.2 Free Movement of Servıces 562.2.8.3 Free Movement of Workers in the Eurozone 572.2.8.4 Free Movement of Capital 572.3 ECONOMIC COMMUNITY OF WEST AFRICAN STATES (ECOWAS) 592.3.1 Overview Of ECOWAS 592.3.2 Aims and Objectives Of ECOWAS 622.3.3 Fundamentals Prıncıples Of ECOWAS 642.3.4 Functions of ECOWAS 652.3.5 Achievements of ECOWAS 662.3.5.1 Political Affairs, Peace and Security 672.3.5.2 The Role Of Ecowas in Guinea Bissau 672.3.5.3 The Role of ECOWAS in Ivory Coast 682.3.5.4 The Role of ECOWAS in Mali 692.3.5.5 The Role of ECOWAS in Liberıa 712.3.5.6 The Adoption of the Macroeconomic Convergence Report by the ECOWAS Convergence Council 732.3.5.7 Establishment of the ECOWAS Monetary Institute (EMI) 742.3.5.8 Provision of a Guide to Keep a Track Record of all Government Financial Transactions.742.3.5.9 Implementation of an Action Plan to Boost Regional Security in the Sahel Region 752.3.5.10 Introduction of a Uniform Trade Development Strategy………………………….752.3.5.11 Signing of the Economic Development Document 762.3.5.12 Establishing a Common External Tariff…………………………….……………. 762.3.5.13 Introducing a Biometric Card to Boost Regional Security and Smooth the Free Movement of ECOWAS citizens……………………………………………………………762.3.5.14 Provision of a Manual to Serve as a Guide in Border Management 772.3.5.15 Launching of the Regional Link Project called Ecolink 782.3.5.16 Launching of an Integrated Financial Management System to Keep Record of all Financial Transactions.782.3.5.17 Renewed Efforts to Enhance Envıronment Governance, General Environmental Protection, Capacity Building as Well as Sustainable Resource Management for Development in the Member States 792.3.5.18 Re-Award of the Contract for the Construction of the Seme-Krake Joint Border Post (Benin – Nigeria) 792.3.5.19 Bemenda Road Between Nigeria and Cameroon and the Construction of a Joınt Border Post (JBP) and a Border at Mfum Border 792.3.5.20 Feasibility Study for the West African Gas Pipeline Network Concluded 802.3.5.21 Development Of Regıonal Power Market With the Settıng Up of Regulatory and Economic Environment 802.3.5.22 Promotion of Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency Technologies and Services 802.3.5.23 An ECOWAS Directive On Energy Efficıency Building (EEB) Aimed at Promotıng Energy Efficency Buildings in the ECOWAS Member State has Been Developed By Ecree 812.3.5.24 Establishment of a Regional Centre for Disease 812.3.5.25 Provision of an Action Plan to Strengthen Regional Security 812.3.5.26 Consolidating the Implementation of the Common Market, Trade Lıberalızatıon Scheme (TIS) and the Protocol on Free Movement of Persons, Goods and Services 812.3.5.27 Signing of the Supplemantary Act on Dakar-Abidjan Corridor, and Laying of the Fırst Stone for the Regional Electrıcıty Project. The Project Covers Cote D'ivoire, Guinea, Liberia and Sierra Leone 812.3.5.28 Implementation Unit of the Abidjan-Lagos Corridor Highway 832.3.6. Challenges of ECOWAS 832.3.6.1 The Trade Factor and the Economy of Member States 832.3.6.2 Financial Sector Disparities and Poor Payment System 842.3.6.3 Challenges of Infrastructure and Regulatory Regime 842.3.6.4 Lack of Political Will 852.3.6.5 Corruption And Polıtical Instability . 862.3.6.6 Challenges Emanating from Colonıal Hang-Over 862.3.7 ECO CURRENCY 872.3.8 FRANCE VS. THE ECO 892.3.9 ECOWAS ECONOMIC OUTLOOK 902.3.9.1 GDP 902.3.9.1.1 ECOWAS Budget Surplus (+) Or Deficit (-) 922.3.9.2 Inflation 932.3.9.3 Interest Rate 942.3.9.4 Exchange Rates 962.3.9.5 Trade 972.3.9.6 Ecowas Employment Status 1042.3.9.6.1 Employment 1042.3.9.6.2 Unemployment 1062.3.10 Eco and the Optimum Currency Area 107CHAPTER 31093. CONCLUSION AND POLICY RECOMMENDATIONS109REFERENCES113

Keyword: widening participation, non-traditional students, teacher strategies, postnational educational system According to Hickling-Hudson et al. (2004:6) 'Indigenous peoples and Indigenous knowledges are marginalized by a view of the world through 'imperial eyes', a view which (re)inscribes the dominant, exclusionary Western beliefs'. Other things being equal, teachers in general are said to draw on three main interrelated and changing knowledge bases: knowledge of content, knowledge of teaching processes and knowledge of their students (Shulman, 1987; Turner-Bisset, 1999). As a dimension of pedagogic practice, the management of non-compliant classroom behavior is varied and historically shaped, subject to ideological, legislative and policy shifts over time. The relation between university teachers and students has to all times been characterized as an asymmetric relation since the teachers have the power of definition of what counts as academic standards. We have seen considerable studies on student perspectives (Stuart, et al 2012). However, a review reveals scarce knowledge about how university teachers try to compensate and include the non-traditional and first-generational students. In this paper, we pay special attention to curricular and pedagogical traditions or management strategies in postnational educational systems, where the majority of students are first-generation and at higher risk of attrition. Assuming that the academic staff (Both Greenlandic and Danish) has bodily incorporated an awareness of these circumstances since they are part of common knowledge of Greenlandic history, an ideal of emancipatory approach derives from compensating both teacher- and postcolonial dominance. The research question asked is how university teachers navigate in this context, what are their experiences and how do they manage to integrate and make students participate more actively and achieve what they consider to be academic standards? The experiences of teachers working in these contexts have rarely been reported in the literature. Our aim is to highlight the ambiguous nature of change of a particular educational system, the Greenlandic University which can be considered a representative of a neocolonial university with Western conceptions of curriculum, pedagogy, and language. In this way the Greenlandic case can be seen as an institution struggling to match western/European standards and at the same time acknowledging the non-traditional behavior. The theoretical framework is based on Bourdieus theory of practice and selective concepts. To understand how the teachers act when teaching, the notion of strategy is used referring to something that rests on a practical 'feel for the game.' Strategies are the result of combining practical good sense with commonly accepted practices. Symbolic power is used to understand and explain the nature of the strategies. The structures of the field arise from differentiation, which is grounded in a defining principle of what is of value. Thus, teachers have the authority and the means to assess students, and do so based on a certain set of assumptions, expectations, and values that are not always explicit. The notion of cultural capital is therefore used to understand the experiences of teachers' strategies in higher education. (Bourdieu, 1986). Methods This study is based on classroom observations and interviews of teachers who joined a university requested pedagogic course to improve their teaching. 18 teachers participated in the course. The teacher participants (of both Danish and Greeenlandic origin) taught in their practices a range of subjects and used Danish, Greenlandic (and English) as the medium of instruction. In order to explore the types of knowledges taught, categories of teaching process knowledge, and the range of pedagogic identities made available to teachers and students, lectures focused on the teachers' descriptions of the learner characteristics of Greenlandic students, their professional roles whilst teaching at the university, and curriculum and pedagogic design. We were interested in understanding how the various teachers are actually working and exploring their various ethical and epistemological stands on the nature of 'true' knowledge, on the 'right' teacher and the 'right' student. To this end, our interviews focused on episodes of classroom trouble that provoked the respondent's intervention and what moral expectations the teachers invoked and legitimated in their efforts to regulate student behaviour (ex. increase participation or student activation). In the interviews, we also queried the two groups of teachers (Danish and Greenlandic) on the students they taught, their own role, professional and social identity, the knowledge transmitted, and their pedagogical strategies whilst teaching. Expected outcomes / results We have identified 4 teacher strategies which have not yet been refined. Here we present 3. Zero-fault on Greenlandic language-strategy in contrast to "teaching in the dark". A Greenlandic teacher expresses a distinct awareness of how she masters her Greenlandic language when teaching students in her mother tongue, Greenlandic. When she writes major pieces/instructions, she consults what she considers "language experts" within and outside the university. During lectures, she enhances her students to correct her if she uses "wrong" words or grammar. In contrast to this rigorous self-policing, we see how Danish teachers on the opposite are ready to give up on the use of understandable language. Several Danish teachers frame disciplinary discussions followed up by plenary sessions where the students are allowed to discuss and work in Greenlandic which is a language the teacher does not understand. The teachers argue that activating the students is crucial in spite of the fact that they are unable to validate or respond to the academic content. One teacher talks about "teaching in the dark". Teaching formalia-strategy A Greenlandic female teacher in her 50's tries to neutralize a classic problem with students not knowing what is expected from them by making an effort teaching in explaining the learning goals. She makes exercises on how to translate the Danish concepts of the learning goals and the key concepts. She makes a virtue out of the semantic translation of the concepts from Danish to Greenlandic, and argues within the framework of Biggs and Blooms taxonomy. She argues theoretically with the concept of "parallel languaging" where the idea is to use both mother tongue and the second language intertwined or parallel. References: A. Marshall, C. (2016). Barriers to accessing higher education. Widening participation, higher education and non-traditional students: Supporting transitions through foundation programmes (pp. 1-18). Macmillan Publishers Ltd. London: Springer Nature. Ball, S., Hoskins, K., Maguire, M., & Braun, A. (2011). Disciplinary texts: A policy analysis of national and local behaviour policies. Critical Studies in Education, 52(1), 1-14. Bourdieu, P. (1977). Outline of a theory of practice Cambridge university press. Bourdieu, P. (1990a). In other words: Essays towards a reflexive sociology Stanford University Press. Bourdieu, P. (1990b). The logic of practice Stanford University Press. Bowl, M. (2003). Non-traditional entrants to higher education: "They talk about people like me.". PO Box 605, Herndon, VA 20172-0605.: Stylus Publishing. Chen, X., & Carroll, C. D. (2005). First-generation students in postsecondary education: A look at their college transcripts. postsecondary education descriptive analysis report. NCES 2005-171. (). Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.: U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics. Hemsley-Brown, J. (2012). 'The best education in the world': Reality, repetition or cliché? international students' reasons for choosing an english university. Studies in Higher Education, 37(8), 1005-1022. Hickling-Hudson, A., Matthews, J. M., & Woods, A. (2004). Education, postcolonialism and disruptions. Disrupting preconceptions: Postcolonialism and education (pp. 1-16). Flaxton: Post Pressed. Langgård, P. (2002). Greenland and the university of. In D. C. Nord, & G. R. Weller (Eds.), Higher education across the circumpolar north: A circle of learning (1st ed., pp. 77-99). New York: PALGRAVE MACMILLAN. greenland Scott, I. (2012). Access, success and curriculum: Aspects of their organic relationship. Alternative Access to Higher Education: Underprepared Students Or Underprepared Education, , 25-49. Shulman, L. (1987). Knowledge and teaching: Foundations of the new reform. Harvard Educational Review, 57(1), 1-23. doi:10.17763/haer.57.1.j463w79r56455411 Shulman, L. (1987). Knowledge and teaching: Foundations of the new reform. Harvard Educational Review, 57(1), 1-23. doi:10.17763/haer.57.1.j463w79r56455411 Skatte- og Velfærdskommissionen. (2010). Hvordan sikres (). Denmark: Skatte- og Velfærdskommissionen. vækst og velfærd i Grønland? Spiegler, T., & Bednarek, A. (2013). First-generation students: What we ask, what we know and what it means: An international review of the state of research. International Studies in Sociology of Education, 23(4), 318-337. doi:10.1080/09620214.2013.815441 Thomas, L. (2002). Student retention in higher education: The role of institutional habitus. Journal of Education Policy, 17(4), 423-442. Turner-Bisset, R. (1999). The knowledge bases of the expert teacher. British Educational Research Journal, 25(1), 39-55. doi:10.1080/0141192990250104 ; According to Hickling-Hudson et al. (2004:6) 'Indigenous peoples and Indigenous knowledges are marginalized by a view of the world through 'imperial eyes', a view which (re)inscribes the dominant, exclusionary Western beliefs'. Other things being equal, teachers in general are said to draw on three main interrelated and changing knowledge bases: knowledge of content, knowledge of teaching processes and knowledge of their students (Shulman, 1987; Turner-Bisset, 1999). As a dimension of pedagogic practice, the management of non-compliant classroom behavior is varied and historically shaped, subject to ideological, legislative and policy shifts over time. The relation between university teachers and students has to all times been characterized as an asymmetric relation since the teachers have the power of definition of what counts as academic standards. We have seen considerable studies on student perspectives (Stuart, et al 2012). However, a review reveals scarce knowledge about how university teachers try to compensate and include the non-traditional and first-generational students. In this paper, we pay special attention to curricular and pedagogical traditions or management strategies in postnational educational systems, where the majority of students are first-generation and at higher risk of attrition. Assuming that the academic staff (Both Greenlandic and Danish) has bodily incorporated an awareness of these circumstances since they are part of common knowledge of Greenlandic history, an ideal of emancipatory approach derives from compensating both teacher- and postcolonial dominance. The research question asked is how university teachers navigate in this context, what are their experiences and how do they manage to integrate and make students participate more actively and achieve what they consider to be academic standards? The experiences of teachers working in these contexts have rarely been reported in the literature. Our aim is to highlight the ambiguous nature of change of a particular educational system, the Greenlandic University which can be considered a representative of a neocolonial university with Western conceptions of curriculum, pedagogy, and language. In this way the Greenlandic case can be seen as an institution struggling to match western/European standards and at the same time acknowledging the non-traditional behavior. The theoretical framework is based on Bourdieus theory of practice and selective concepts. To understand how the teachers act when teaching, the notion of strategy is used referring to something that rests on a practical 'feel for the game.' Strategies are the result of combining practical good sense with commonly accepted practices. Symbolic power is used to understand and explain the nature of the strategies. The structures of the field arise from differentiation, which is grounded in a defining principle of what is of value. Thus, teachers have the authority and the means to assess students, and do so based on a certain set of assumptions, expectations, and values that are not always explicit. The notion of cultural capital is therefore used to understand the experiences of teachers' strategies in higher education. (Bourdieu, 1986).

Normal
0




false
false
false

EN-US
X-NONE
X-NONE
















































































































































































































































































































































































































/* Style Definitions */
table.MsoNormalTable
{mso-style-name:"Table Normal";
mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
mso-style-noshow:yes;
mso-style-priority:99;
mso-style-parent:"";
mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
mso-para-margin-top:0in;
mso-para-margin-right:0in;
mso-para-margin-bottom:8.0pt;
mso-para-margin-left:0in;
line-height:107%;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:11.0pt;
font-family:"Calibri",sans-serif;
mso-ascii-font-family:Calibri;
mso-ascii-theme-font:minor-latin;
mso-hansi-font-family:Calibri;
mso-hansi-theme-font:minor-latin;}

Members of Congress go to Washington and establish
reputational styles which help explain to constituents the work that they do
while on Capitol Hill. There is no one way to "correctly" represent a place,
but a representational style chosen by a member reflects in part the priorities
of the geographic constituency the member represents and their own personal
inclinations born from their pre-congressional careers. Richard Fenno (1978), in his
book Home Style, documented the
various representational styles developed by members of Congress and used by
them when explaining their "Washington Work" back home. Fenno documents three
rough representational types: the constituent servant, the policy expert, and
the member of Congress as "one of us."




I discuss these in detail elsewhere (Parker 2015, Parker and Goodman 2009, Parker and Goodman 2013), so I'll be brief.. A constituent servant helps constituents with casework, policy experts
work on legislation and develop proficiency in a particular issue area, while "one
of us" representatives "work to display their
connectivity to a place and a group—and through that connection, demonstrate
trustworthiness" (Parker 2015: 15).





It is clear that Congressman Zinke is comfortably slipping
into a policy expert representational style—emphasizing his defense and foreign
relations credentials (which are bolstered by his membership on the House Armed
Services Committee). This makes sense for two reasons. First, it allows him to
draw upon a pre-political career, which is a considerable electoral and
governing asset. Second, it allows him to establish a representational
relationship without competing directly with Senator Jon Tester or Senator Steve
Daines. I wrote a blog some time ago noting how House members representing a
state share a representational space with two U.S. Senators (see also Wendy
Schiller's Partners and Rivals). Just
as U.S. Senators need to figure out how to craft their own distinctive reputations,
so, too, must House members representing a state. This is especially important
because media coverage and space are at a particular premium in these smaller
states; to get attention, you must be doing something different from the rest
of the delegation.



Members of the House face an additional complication
when they are the lone representative. Many House members develop constituent
service reputations in the House. But, as the work of Lee and Oppenheimer (1999)
demonstrate, constituents in small states are more likely to contact their
senators to solve problems and address casework concerns because senators are
just as accessible, if not more so, than the House members in small states. In
fact, the Montana's senators have nearly twice the personal staff as the House
member and have more offices back home. One of Congressman Denny Rehberg's
biggest challenges in his 2012 campaign was overcoming this official resource
disparity to compete successfully with Senator Tester—and it is this disparity
as much as other issues that was responsible for his loss.



Congressman Zinke, in choosing to develop a policy
expert representational style, is consciously avoiding the problem faced by
Congressman Rehberg and other House members representing entire states. He is
striking out in a policy area not clearly owned by either Tester or Daines, and
he can establish a favorable reputation among constituents without necessarily
being in the position to be unfavorably compared to the Senate delegation from the
get go. Congressmen simply cannot effectively compete as constituent servants
against their Senate delegation in big states. It is a losing proposition. 



But, Congressman Zinke is doing far more with his policy
expert representational style than becoming a statewide voice on national security
matters and simply settling into his House seat for the long haul. Indeed,
Congressman Zinke is consciously building a media presence well-beyond the
statewide Montana media. 



Congressman Zinke, unlike his fellow House freshman,
is getting noticed by national news outlets. He has appeared on CNN's State of
the Union, on the O'Reilly Factor, and on Fox News with Sean Hannity. He was
mentioned in a New York Times piece
on veterans in Congress, and had an op-ed published in the Washington Times. This is very unusual indeed for a freshman House
member.



How unusual? Let's
go to the data!



I searched Lexis-Nexis Academic between January 5 and
February 19, 2015 for each instance a freshman member of Congress' name
appeared in print, in the transcripts of national news broadcasts, or on blogs.
I then produced two quick scatterplots. Both scatterplots have each freshmen
house member, alphabetically listed by state, on the X Axis. 



The first scatterplot here has the number of mentions
in national broadcast news broadcasts on the Y axis. The black line is the mean
number of mentions, which is a bit more than one mention. The modal category is
zero—meaning most House freshman in the 114th Congress are simply
not mentioned by national news broadcasts. Congressman Zinke had five mentions—well
above the average. I also indicate the other House freshman who had more
mentions that Congressman Zinke. (Click on the plot for a larger version)










This actually underestimates, however, the attention
Zinke has received. Congressman Zinke was not just mentioned—he was an invited
guest on these programs on five occasions he shows up in the database. In each
instance, Congressman Zinke focused his remarks on national security and foreign
policy. 






Only Congresswoman Mia Love, a freshman Republican
from Utah, who is both Mormon and a Haitian-American, has received anywhere
close to the attention from the national networks. And while she has been
mentioned more than Zinke on national television, she has only been a guest on a
national news program twice. In fact, what seems to explain the attention given
to the other freshman are special descriptive qualities about them.
Congresswoman Elise Stefanik is the youngest woman ever to serve in Congress.
Congressman Curbelo is a Latino Republican who is becoming the party's face on
immigration. And Congressman Lee Zeldin is the only Jewish Republican in the
chamber and is a vocal critic of the administration from his perch on the
foreign relations committee.



In the second scatterplot, the Y-axis represents the
total number of mentions of each freshman House member of the 114th
Congress on national news and in non-home state newspapers and blogs. The mean
mention was seven (indicated by the bold black line). Again, Congressman Zinke
outperforms this by far, with a total of 16 mentions—more than twice the
average mentions across all three media platforms. (Click on the plot for a larger version)











(Quick side note: As other scholarship has shown,
members of the majority party seem to get a media attention bonus and that's
the case here—Republican freshman in the House have slightly higher mentions on
the web, in newspapers, and especially on television than Democratic freshmen).



Developing strong national defense credentials from
which to build a constituency beyond Montana helps Zinke both in terms of
reelection to the House and burnishes his credentials in a possible challenge
to Jon Tester in 2018. How?



First, national media attention is often seen as
desirable by constituents. In one study of national media exposure of U.S.
Senators, Barbara Sinclair (1990) found that the number of mentions in The New York Times is associated with
higher job approval ratings and feeling thermometer scores from individual
constituents. Second, national media attention can also lead to additional
power within the hall of Congress itself. Sinclair also writes that "within the
Washington political community, national media exposure serves as an indicators
that the senator is a player of consequence and, by showing she or he can
command an audience, it increases the senator's clout" (489). Zinke benefits by
seeking out and successfully obtaining national media coverage on the campaign
trail and in Washington.



But, thinking long term, developing a national media
attention brings an added bonus beyond the obvious exposure to a network of national
Republicans critical to raising the substantial sums necessary to fund a
competitive Senate bid against an incumbent. It helps craft the perception of an
activist representational style that constituents tend to expect from U.S.
Senators more so than from individual members of Congress.



I present two pieces of evidence in support. The first
is from Fenno's book on North Dakota Senator Mark Andrews, When Incumbency Fails (1992). In that book, Senator Andrews—elected
to his first term in 1980—is concerned about the prospect of facing a strong
challenge from the state's Democratic Congressman, Byron Dorgan. Dorgan, unlike
Andrews, received considerable positive publicity around the North Dakota and
was constantly holding forums with constituents. Andrews, on the hand, came
home less often and spent much of his time mired in policy detail behind the
scenes—while garnishing negative media attention due to a malpractice lawsuit
he and his wife had launched against the state's medical establishment in Fargo.
Fenno argues that Andrews was trapped by the constituent service, small ball
legislative politics style he developed as a member of the House Appropriations
Committee—a style which seemed too little for the expectations North Dakotans
had of their U.S. Senator.



The second is my own book, Battle for the Big Sky. In that book, I did three focus groups with
voters in Gallatin County. One of the questions I asked was whether they saw
senators and members of Congress playing different roles. On the whole, they
agreed that the two positions were qualitatively different. Here's what Nicholas,
a 60 year old retired policeman said on the subject:



"I tend,"
said Nicholas, to "see a senator as having the potential to be in the role as a
statesperson much more than a representative."62 Senators could "get
something done" because the House members are "one per­son in a sea." Not only
would the Senate get more done but it would be more careful, "more considerate.
[They] will more thoroughly look at something, be more educated on the topic"
(153-154).



In this vein, Zinke looks—in cultivating his
representational style and national media attention—like he's positioning
himself for a run at the U.S. Senate. Add to this the fact that he has been
openly critical of Senator Tester on more than one occasion (here and here) since taking
office, and I very much suspect that he will try to do what Denny Rehberg could
not: Unseat Senator Tester.









I asked Zinke about this on KBZK this morning. Watch the interview here.


He pooh-poohed the idea, saying that as a member of the "loyal opposition" it was his job to occasionally criticize the other side and that there's nothing amiss in his relationship with Montana's senior senator.



Will he run and, if he runs, will he succeed? I don't
know. I do know, however, that I will be paying careful attention in the months
and years ahead for hints and clues as to the Congressman's true intentions.

La presente Tesis titulada "Modelo Metodológico de la Auditoría Financiera con Enfoque Integral para el Sistema Nacional de Control", es de carácter descriptivo y explicativo fundamentada en la experiencia profesional obtenida en el campo de la auditoría financiera y las investigaciones realizadas en torno a la labor de fiscalización y control que viene desarrollando el ente rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, en cumplimiento de lo establecido en los artículos 81° y 82° de la Constitución Política del Perú, y la atribución conferida en el artículo 22° literal f) de la Ley N° 27785 de 22.Jul.2002, Ley Orgánica del Sistema Nacional de Control y de la Contraloría General de la República. Actualmente, la Contraloría General de la República como ente técnico rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, viene modificando las normas de control gubernamental y procedimientos técnicos correspondientes al ejercicio del control gubernamental, de conformidad con el artículo 14° de la Ley N° 27785, Ley Orgánica del Sistema Nacional de Control y de la Contraloría General de la República; afectando directamente el enfoque metodológico de la auditoría financiera y otras auditorías, al haber aprobado las Normas Generales de Control Gubernamental (NGCG), a través del cual dejan sin efecto la aplicación de las Normas de Auditoría Gubernamental (NAGUs), el Manual de Auditoría Gubernamental (MAGU), la Guía de Planeamiento de Auditoría Gubernamental, y la Guía para la Elaboración del Informe de Auditoría Gubernamental. Posteriormente la Contraloría General de la República, aprobó el Manual de Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental, que es un documento normativo, de obligatorio cumplimiento, que define el proceso para el ejercicio de la auditoría a los estados financieros y presupuestales, y ha sido diseñado para su aplicación por las Sociedades de Auditoría, los Órganos de Control Institucional, así como la Contraloría General de la República en la ejecución de la auditoría financiera y presupuestaria, de conformidad con las normas de control gubernamental, concordado con las normas internacionales de auditoría vigentes. Sin embargo, pese a los cambios que viene realizando el ente rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, estos no resuelven el problema planteado en la Tesis titulada "Modelo Metodológico de la Auditoría Financiera con Enfoque Integral para el Sistema Nacional de Control", la misma que debe ser superado con el modelo metodológico que se propone en la Tesis, la misma que prioriza la validación integral de los actos y resultados de la gestión pública, el uso eficiente, eficaz y económico de los recursos y bienes del Estado, así como del cumplimiento de las normas legales y de los lineamientos de política y planes de acción establecidos por las entidades públicas en sus Planes Estratégicos. Por ello, señalamos que el Sistema Nacional de Control, no tiene un modelo metodológico de auditoría financiera que tienda a transparentar la información presupuestaria y financiera del Estado peruano, identificando los actos de corrupción y promoviendo la mejora continua de la gestión pública; asuntos que se superaría de aplicarse la metodología y herramientas modernas que proponemos, a través de la implantación y aplicación de la Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental con Enfoque Integral, la cual busca aplicar un control de advertencia o de prevención para que el administrador público conozca en tiempo real las inconsistencias detectadas en su gestión y proceda a subsanarlas, con lo finalidad de convertir a las entidades públicas en entes eficientes y eficaces, que cumplan con el fin último del control que es su mejoramiento continuo y modernización que asegure el cumplimiento de su misión, visión y objetivos en bien de los ciudadanos de nuestro país. Esta gran diferencia entre lo que se aplica en el Perú y lo que se aplica por ejemplo en Colombia, en materia de control gubernamental, ha conllevado a que se efectúe esta investigación que tiene por objetivo general, identificar y aplicar modernos enfoques de auditoría financiera integral que permita obtener resultados de la evaluación de gestión de las entidades públicas y promueva su mejora continua. Para llevar a cabo esta investigación se ha considerado tomar en cuenta el universo que conforman el Sistema Nacional de Control (empresas, entidades, ministerios y gobiernos regionales y locales) de los cuáles tomamos como muestra la información financiera auditada de 15 entidades: 05 Ministerios, 02 Universidades, 03 Gobiernos Regionales, 02 Gobiernos Locales, y 03 Empresas del Estado. Además, consideraremos entrevistarnos con 10 socios de firmas de auditores que auditaron esas entidades que representan la muestra de estudio, 10 funcionarios de entidades auditadas y 10 contadores públicos. Para cumplir con nuestro objetivo, se procedió a efectuar una encuesta a los participantes de nuestra muestra y cuyo principal dato obtenido es que el Sistema Nacional de Control actualmente no permite la evaluación integral de la gestión y sus efectos financieros y presupuestarios, plasmados en los estados financieros y estados presupuestarios; a fin de validar el uso eficiente, eficaz y económico de los recursos del Estado, por lo que es prioritario que la Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental con enfoque Integral, sea aplicada con prontitud, para lo cual deberá modificarse la normatividad actual vigente, que permita a la Contraloría General de la República, su modernización y aplicación herramientas tecnológicas y enfoques modernos de auditoría en las actividades y acciones de control que programe y ejecute en el ámbito del sector gubernamental. El enfoque de auditoría integral propuesto se fundamenta en el conocimiento integral de la entidad gubernamental a ser auditada en su entorno sistémico, el cual conlleva a evaluar la planificación de su gestión verificando el cumplimiento de su misión, visión y objetivos, a través de los documentos de gestión que generan, y su alineamiento con las políticas públicas del gobierno, asimismo, evaluar los resultados de la gestión a través de los procesos que desarrolla, identificando y proponiendo recomendaciones que superen los riesgos internos y/o externos que los hayan afectado. Este cambio metodológico se efectúa en cinco fases que explicamos ampliamente en este trabajo, el cual buscamos se formalice mediante normas que aseguren la reforma integral del Sistema Nacional de Control en el Perú. Palabras claves: Enfoque, Sistema, Auditoría, Integral, Control. ; --- This thesis titled "Model methodological of the audit financial with approach Integral to the National Control System", is character descriptive and explanatory grounded in professional experience obtained in the field of the financial audit and investigations around the work of control and control being developed by the governing body of the national system of Control in compliance with provisions in articles 81 ° and 82 ° of the Constitution politics in Peru, and attribution in article 22 literal ° f) of the Act N ° 27785 22.Jul.2002, organic law of the system National Control and the Comptroller General of the Republic. Actually, the General Comptroller of the Republic as a technical entity rector of the National Control System , it comes by modifying the rules of Government control and technical procedures for the exercise of Government control, in accordance with article 14 of the law N ° 27785, organic law of the system National Control and the Office of the Comptroller General; directly affecting the methodology of the financial audit and other audit approach, adopting general rules of governmental Control (NGCG), through which they leave without effect the application of the rules of audit Government (NAGUs) and Manual of governmental audit (MAGU), governmental audit planning guide, the Guide to the preparation of the report of audit Government. Subsequently the Office of the Comptroller-General approved the audit financial Government Manual, which is a normative, binding document, which defines the process for the exercise of the audit the financial and budget States, and has been designed for its application, audit companies, the institutional supervisory bodies, as well as the Comptroller General of the Republic in the implementation of the audit financial and budgetary in accordance with the rules of Government control, agreed with the international standards of audit. However, despite the changes being the governing body of the national system of Control, these do not solve the problem raised in the thesis entitled "Methodological model of auditing financial with comprehensive approach to national Control System", which should be overcome with the methodological model proposed in the thesis, which prioritises the comprehensive validation of acts and results of public management, the efficient, effective and economic use of the resources and assets of the State, as well as the compliance with legal norms and policy guidelines and action plans established by public entities in their plans Strategic. By this, we emphasize that the identified problems would be overcome to apply modern tools we propose, through the implementation and application of the governmental financial audit with Integral approach and methodology which it seeks to apply a warning or prevention control so the public administrator know real-time inconsistencies detected in its management and appropriate to remedy them, with the purpose of converting to public entities in efficient and effective, entities that comply with the ultimate aim of the control which is its continuous improvement and modernization that will ensure the fulfillment of its mission vision and goals for the good of the citizens of our country. This difference between what applies in the Peru and which applies for example in Colombia, in terms of Government control, has led to this investigation that general objective, identify and implement modern approaches to comprehensive financial audit that allows results of the evaluation of management of public entities and promote continuous improvement. To carry out this investigation has been considered taking into account the universe that make up the national system of Control (companies, institutions, ministries and regional and local governments) which we take as a sample 15 entities: 05 ministries, universities 02, 03 regional Governments, local government 02, and 03 State enterprises. In addition, we will consider interview 10 partners of firms of Auditors which trail those entities that represent the study sample, 10 officials from auditees and 10 public accountants. To achieve our objective, we proceeded to carry out a survey to participants in our sample and whose main retrieved data is that national Control system currently does not allow the comprehensive assessment of the management and their financial and budgetary, effects reflected in the financial statements and budget States; in order to validate the use of efficient, effective and economic resources of the State, so it is a priority that the governmental financial audit with Integral approach is applied promptly, for which need to modify the current regulations, which allow the Comptroller General of the Republic, its modernization and application technology tools and modern approaches of auditing activities and control actions that you schedule and execute in the scope of the sector government. The proposed comprehensive audit approach is based on the comprehensive understanding of the Government entity to be audited in their systemic environment, which leads to evaluate its management planning by verifying the fulfillment of its mission, vision and objectives, through documents management generated, and their alignment with the policies of the Government, also evaluate the results of management through processes that developed, identifying and proposing recommendations that exceed the internal and/or external risks that have affected them. This methodological change is carried out in five phases which widely explained in this work, which seek to formalize rules that ensure the comprehensive reform of the national system of Control in the Peru. Key words: approach, system, audit, comprehensive Control. ; Tesis

La presente Tesis titulada "Modelo Metodológico de la Auditoría Financiera con Enfoque Integral para el Sistema Nacional de Control", es de carácter descriptivo y explicativo fundamentada en la experiencia profesional obtenida en el campo de la auditoría financiera y las investigaciones realizadas en torno a la labor de fiscalización y control que viene desarrollando el ente rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, en cumplimiento de lo establecido en los artículos 81° y 82° de la Constitución Política del Perú, y la atribución conferida en el artículo 22° literal f) de la Ley N° 27785 de 22.Jul.2002, Ley Orgánica del Sistema Nacional de Control y de la Contraloría General de la República. Actualmente, la Contraloría General de la República como ente técnico rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, viene modificando las normas de control gubernamental y procedimientos técnicos correspondientes al ejercicio del control gubernamental, de conformidad con el artículo 14° de la Ley N° 27785, Ley Orgánica del Sistema Nacional de Control y de la Contraloría General de la República; afectando directamente el enfoque metodológico de la auditoría financiera y otras auditorías, al haber aprobado las Normas Generales de Control Gubernamental (NGCG), a través del cual dejan sin efecto la aplicación de las Normas de Auditoría Gubernamental (NAGUs), el Manual de Auditoría Gubernamental (MAGU), la Guía de Planeamiento de Auditoría Gubernamental, y la Guía para la Elaboración del Informe de Auditoría Gubernamental. Posteriormente la Contraloría General de la República, aprobó el Manual de Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental, que es un documento normativo, de obligatorio cumplimiento, que define el proceso para el ejercicio de la auditoría a los estados financieros y presupuestales, y ha sido diseñado para su aplicación por las Sociedades de Auditoría, los Órganos de Control Institucional, así como la Contraloría General de la República en la ejecución de la auditoría financiera y presupuestaria, de conformidad con las normas de control gubernamental, concordado con las normas internacionales de auditoría vigentes. Sin embargo, pese a los cambios que viene realizando el ente rector del Sistema Nacional de Control, estos no resuelven el problema planteado en la Tesis titulada "Modelo Metodológico de la Auditoría Financiera con Enfoque Integral para el Sistema Nacional de Control", la misma que debe ser superado con el modelo metodológico que se propone en la Tesis, la misma que prioriza la validación integral de los actos y resultados de la gestión pública, el uso eficiente, eficaz y económico de los recursos y bienes del Estado, así como del cumplimiento de las normas legales y de los lineamientos de política y planes de acción establecidos por las entidades públicas en sus Planes Estratégicos. Por ello, señalamos que el Sistema Nacional de Control, no tiene un modelo metodológico de auditoría financiera que tienda a transparentar la información presupuestaria y financiera del Estado peruano, identificando los actos de corrupción y promoviendo la mejora continua de la gestión pública; asuntos que se superaría de aplicarse la metodología y herramientas modernas que proponemos, a través de la implantación y aplicación de la Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental con Enfoque Integral, la cual busca aplicar un control de advertencia o de prevención para que el administrador público conozca en tiempo real las inconsistencias detectadas en su gestión y proceda a subsanarlas, con lo finalidad de convertir a las entidades públicas en entes eficientes y eficaces, que cumplan con el fin último del control que es su mejoramiento continuo y modernización que asegure el cumplimiento de su misión, visión y objetivos en bien de los ciudadanos de nuestro país. Esta gran diferencia entre lo que se aplica en el Perú y lo que se aplica por ejemplo en Colombia, en materia de control gubernamental, ha conllevado a que se efectúe esta investigación que tiene por objetivo general, identificar y aplicar modernos enfoques de auditoría financiera integral que permita obtener resultados de la evaluación de gestión de las entidades públicas y promueva su mejora continua. Para llevar a cabo esta investigación se ha considerado tomar en cuenta el universo que conforman el Sistema Nacional de Control (empresas, entidades, ministerios y gobiernos regionales y locales) de los cuáles tomamos como muestra la información financiera auditada de 15 entidades: 05 Ministerios, 02 Universidades, 03 Gobiernos Regionales, 02 Gobiernos Locales, y 03 Empresas del Estado. Además, consideraremos entrevistarnos con 10 socios de firmas de auditores que auditaron esas entidades que representan la muestra de estudio, 10 funcionarios de entidades auditadas y 10 contadores públicos. Para cumplir con nuestro objetivo, se procedió a efectuar una encuesta a los participantes de nuestra muestra y cuyo principal dato obtenido es que el Sistema Nacional de Control actualmente no permite la evaluación integral de la gestión y sus efectos financieros y presupuestarios, plasmados en los estados financieros y estados presupuestarios; a fin de validar el uso eficiente, eficaz y económico de los recursos del Estado, por lo que es prioritario que la Auditoría Financiera Gubernamental con enfoque Integral, sea aplicada con prontitud, para lo cual deberá modificarse la normatividad actual vigente, que permita a la Contraloría General de la República, su modernización y aplicación herramientas tecnológicas y enfoques modernos de auditoría en las actividades y acciones de control que programe y ejecute en el ámbito del sector gubernamental. El enfoque de auditoría integral propuesto se fundamenta en el conocimiento integral de la entidad gubernamental a ser auditada en su entorno sistémico, el cual conlleva a evaluar la planificación de su gestión verificando el cumplimiento de su misión, visión y objetivos, a través de los documentos de gestión que generan, y su alineamiento con las políticas públicas del gobierno, asimismo, evaluar los resultados de la gestión a través de los procesos que desarrolla, identificando y proponiendo recomendaciones que superen los riesgos internos y/o externos que los hayan afectado. Este cambio metodológico se efectúa en cinco fases que explicamos ampliamente en este trabajo, el cual buscamos se formalice mediante normas que aseguren la reforma integral del Sistema Nacional de Control en el Perú. Palabras claves: Enfoque, Sistema, Auditoría, Integral, Control. ; --- This thesis titled "Model methodological of the audit financial with approach Integral to the National Control System", is character descriptive and explanatory grounded in professional experience obtained in the field of the financial audit and investigations around the work of control and control being developed by the governing body of the national system of Control in compliance with provisions in articles 81 ° and 82 ° of the Constitution politics in Peru, and attribution in article 22 literal ° f) of the Act N ° 27785 22.Jul.2002, organic law of the system National Control and the Comptroller General of the Republic. Actually, the General Comptroller of the Republic as a technical entity rector of the National Control System , it comes by modifying the rules of Government control and technical procedures for the exercise of Government control, in accordance with article 14 of the law N ° 27785, organic law of the system National Control and the Office of the Comptroller General; directly affecting the methodology of the financial audit and other audit approach, adopting general rules of governmental Control (NGCG), through which they leave without effect the application of the rules of audit Government (NAGUs) and Manual of governmental audit (MAGU), governmental audit planning guide, the Guide to the preparation of the report of audit Government. Subsequently the Office of the Comptroller-General approved the audit financial Government Manual, which is a normative, binding document, which defines the process for the exercise of the audit the financial and budget States, and has been designed for its application, audit companies, the institutional supervisory bodies, as well as the Comptroller General of the Republic in the implementation of the audit financial and budgetary in accordance with the rules of Government control, agreed with the international standards of audit. However, despite the changes being the governing body of the national system of Control, these do not solve the problem raised in the thesis entitled "Methodological model of auditing financial with comprehensive approach to national Control System", which should be overcome with the methodological model proposed in the thesis, which prioritises the comprehensive validation of acts and results of public management, the efficient, effective and economic use of the resources and assets of the State, as well as the compliance with legal norms and policy guidelines and action plans established by public entities in their plans Strategic. By this, we emphasize that the identified problems would be overcome to apply modern tools we propose, through the implementation and application of the governmental financial audit with Integral approach and methodology which it seeks to apply a warning or prevention control so the public administrator know real-time inconsistencies detected in its management and appropriate to remedy them, with the purpose of converting to public entities in efficient and effective, entities that comply with the ultimate aim of the control which is its continuous improvement and modernization that will ensure the fulfillment of its mission vision and goals for the good of the citizens of our country. This difference between what applies in the Peru and which applies for example in Colombia, in terms of Government control, has led to this investigation that general objective, identify and implement modern approaches to comprehensive financial audit that allows results of the evaluation of management of public entities and promote continuous improvement. To carry out this investigation has been considered taking into account the universe that make up the national system of Control (companies, institutions, ministries and regional and local governments) which we take as a sample 15 entities: 05 ministries, universities 02, 03 regional Governments, local government 02, and 03 State enterprises. In addition, we will consider interview 10 partners of firms of Auditors which trail those entities that represent the study sample, 10 officials from auditees and 10 public accountants. To achieve our objective, we proceeded to carry out a survey to participants in our sample and whose main retrieved data is that national Control system currently does not allow the comprehensive assessment of the management and their financial and budgetary, effects reflected in the financial statements and budget States; in order to validate the use of efficient, effective and economic resources of the State, so it is a priority that the governmental financial audit with Integral approach is applied promptly, for which need to modify the current regulations, which allow the Comptroller General of the Republic, its modernization and application technology tools and modern approaches of auditing activities and control actions that you schedule and execute in the scope of the sector government. The proposed comprehensive audit approach is based on the comprehensive understanding of the Government entity to be audited in their systemic environment, which leads to evaluate its management planning by verifying the fulfillment of its mission, vision and objectives, through documents management generated, and their alignment with the policies of the Government, also evaluate the results of management through processes that developed, identifying and proposing recommendations that exceed the internal and/or external risks that have affected them. This methodological change is carried out in five phases which widely explained in this work, which seek to formalize rules that ensure the comprehensive reform of the national system of Control in the Peru. Key words: approach, system, audit, comprehensive Control. ; Tesis

THE USE OF NATURALLY OCCURRING MOOD- altering substances is deeply rooted in the traditions and cultures of many communities worldwide. As documented in other societies and historical records,1,2 various compounds have been employed for altering consciousness and for their curative effects.3 Two substances traditionally used in the Middle East include hashish and khat.4 Hashish, as cannabis, has been known in the region since ancient times.5 Khat, also known as chat, derived from the leaves and young shoots of the khat plant (Catha edulis), is used for its stimulant effect.6 Technological advances that enable high purification of drugs and transporting them fast, and increasing urbanisation, have caused these mood altering substances to be taken out of their traditional role in societies and have come to pose new, complex and challenging threats.7 These threats have been manifested in two important ways: () wider use of drugs, and (2) a shift from natural drugs to the more potent purer forms. Globally, illegal money derived from illicit drug transactions amounts to 400 billion dollars annually, and is second only to the arms trade.8,9 The countries of the Arabian Gulf Co-operation Council (GCC) offers an interesting study area because their diverse cultures have experienced rapid acculturation, a phenomenon often equated with a rise in psychosocial stress.10 Psychosocial stress has often been associated with vulnerability to self poisoning11 and substance abuse.12 Although there are no adequate statistical studies to indicate the incidence of substance dependency in the GCC, it is clear that substance abuse is not a minor problem considering the number of reported drug seizures by the authorities.13 In real terms, the drugs seized by law enforcement authorities constitute only 5–0 percent of the actual quantity.14 Comprehensive data on the pattern of substance dependency is hampered by the criminal and moral stigma associated with substance dependency. Whatever the real number of people afflicted with addiction, substance dependency is a severe problem when considered in terms of personal distress, family disruption and interference with productivity and economic growth. Efforts have been undertaken in GCC countries to reduce the demand for drugs and to prevent drug abuse before it occurs. These efforts are coordinated through the Demand Reduction Committee, created in 200 with members from all countries of the GCC. The committee provides leadership in coordinating and facilitating strategies in this area including law enforcement, rehabilitation and leading and assisting the community in the task of education and prevention of substance abuse. Some studies have suggested that substance dependency occurs in adolescents in all strata of the society.14–16 However, these studies are limited to self-report questionnaires based on secondary school students. Although peer pressure is likely to play a significant part in the initiation of substance abuse,16 the subsequent heavy abuse is often associated with various psychosocial factors. It has been suggested that of all the social factors that predispose individuals to substance abuse, boredom is the most significant.14,17 The recent affluence and modernisation of the GCC societies have led many people to have a lot of spare time, as household chores are carried out by expatriate servants.14 The detrimental effects of such a lifestyle, including substance dependency, have been speculated in the literature.13,18–21 In a study cited by Al-Harthi14 of personality profiles and descriptive analyses of typical substance users enrolled in a treatment centre in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, the most frequently stated reason for indulging in drugs was to escape boredom. This view, though substantiated by other studies in the region,22,23 has not taken into account the relationship of individual temperament to substance abuse. Recent studies have suggested that phenotypical "risk takers" or "sensation seekers" are often not inhibited from yielding to various illicit practices including substance abuse.24 Future studies in the region should examine the association between personality types, risk taking behaviour and boredom. The premise that the rise in substance dependency might be precipitated by erosion of traditional family networks and skewed social expectations might be relevant to GCC countries. Al-Hashmi18 has suggested that modernisation has resulted in the Omani family becoming nuclear at the cost of the traditional extended family. Concurrently, domestic servants brought from overseas, often illiterate in the dominant language, are providing much of the socialisation to children. Reinforced by frequent international travelling, satellite televisions and the Internet, acculturation appears to have occurred too quickly in GCC societies. Smith has remarked that these changes have brought these communities development that took a thousand years in Europe in less than 20 years.25 Studies from other parts of the world that have experienced similar rapid pace of modernisation have shown disintegration of native culture and identity as well as dissolution of the social network, to which individuals had previously turned for help when in trouble.26 In addition, the spread of education have resulted in higher levels of expectations. In the new social order, individuals in the region tend to regard employment opportunities, guaranteed higher levels of income, and especially, higher social standing, as acquired rights. Frustration of the desire to climb the social ladder leads to social insecurity.14 The present situation of society in transition fits with the classical sociological observations of Ibn Khaldun and Emile Durkheim: rapid transformation leads to breakdown of traditional social cohesion.14As a result, the sense of belonging becomes a luxury, leading to social drift, alienation, and the proliferation of social misfits. The society itself may become anomic. The relationship between acculturation, anomie and drug taking has received empirical support.27 The present tendency is to view substance abuse in its psychosocial context rather than on moral terms. While more studies that are comprehensive are needed to examine the pattern of use and misuse of drugs in the GCC countries, there are various reasons to assume that substance dependency is likely to continue to pose a problem in the region. First, the geography helps both trafficking and consumption. GCC countries are located close to the "Golden Triangle" or "Drug Belt", a part of Asia where underdevelopment and political instability have fuelled drug driven economies. Second, being on a major route for international airlines and sea routes by virtue of being in the middle of the world, GCC countries are at constant risk of being used as trans-shipment points for drug trafficking. The Arabian Peninsula has a vast coastline with its horizon overlooking major sea routes to different continents. Even if vigilance to guard its borders is heightened, such a long coastline would remain porous. Moreover, effective surveillance would require more allocation of resources and work force, drawing vital resources away from establishing essential remedial and rehabilitation services for the victims of substance abuse. Thirdly, the increasing number of visitors and the presence of foreign labour in the GCC also help make the "Gulf route" a crossroad for trans-world drug supplies. Some individuals may fall prey to the fallouts from these passing illegal shipments even though they may be destined elsewhere. It is also possible that an increase in consumption of illicit substances among the local population has in itself escalated the demand. In support of the latter view are the rising statistics on the mortality related to drug abuse and the number of clients seeking treatment in rehabilitation centres in the GCC states.15,28 Dispensing accurate information on issues related to substance abuse is a key component to fighting drug abuse. Studies are needed to illuminate the effect of substance dependency in the GGC countries as the mass media often tends to downplay the risks of drug use, or sometimes even glamorises it. Evidence is emerging on the personal consequences of substance dependency. Okasha, in the context of Egypt, has demonstrated that substance dependency is likely to lead to underachievement at school or work and exacerbate family stress, financial burdens and exposure to criminal activity.29 However, literature does not discern whether these social problems are the cause or the effect of the substance dependency. Substance dependency is often associated with psychiatric morbidity30 but it is not clear whether this is cause or effect. Karam et al in their report from Lebanon suggest a strong relationship between addiction to substances of abuse and psychiatric diagnoses.31 These authors further suggest that certain personality types often abuse specific substances. However, such a simplistic view appears to be merely reiterating the chicken-or-the-egg argument. Some authors have suggested that substance dependency is a form of self-medication, which implies that individuals with substance dependency have high levels of psychosocial distress and use illicit drugs in an attempt to alleviate their distress. This is relevant to the suggestion that some psychiatric symptoms may mimic withdrawal effects of chronic substance dependency and withdrawal symptomatology co-varies with cognitive and psychological functioning.32 In addition to psychiatric illness, substance dependency has been seen to increase the risk of adverse drug reactions. A well-known complication of substance dependency is the risk of transmission of human immunodeficiency virus and other infections.33 VISIBLE PATTERNS IN THE GCC The discovery of oil in the GCC has brought rapid modernisation as well as unprecedented material progress and economic security.34 Although GCC nationals, like other cultural groups in developing countries, are thought to have beliefs that protect them against developing substance dependency, such beliefs appear to be eroding with the rising tide of acculturation and economic restructuring. Demographic factors such as the preponderance of adolescents in the population will continue to elude those advocating demand reduction policies even if harsher penalties are decreed for traffickers and users. Approximately 60% of the population in the region are less than 20 years old.35 As reported elsewhere, 36 adolescents are prone to risk taking behaviour, a temperament that has been associated with developmental milestones including the underdevelopment of the orbital-frontal cortex.34 In GCC countries, the rate of juvenile delinquency has, in a span of 0 years, increased approximately by 400%. Unless the needs of such a large and important segment of society as its young people are addressed, this may present a demographic time-bomb with unpredictable social consequences. With a fast growing population, competitions for social and occupational roles are likely to be more intense, leaving many failed individuals behind. With such a demographic trend, it is likely that many individuals carry a greater risk of developing various adjustment difficulties including substance dependency.37 Data emanating from other developing countries suggest that drug peddlers tend to target the poor and the unemployed. Whereas substance dependency in other parts of the world is often associated with economic and social breakdown,38 no study has examined whether substance dependency in the GCC countries follows the same pattern.39 Preliminary observations in Oman suggest that there is relationship between unemployment and propensity for substance abuse.14 Interestingly, the study suggests that addiction to illicit drugs is likely to interfere with employment, often rendering some individuals to lose their jobs. In the midst of such conflicting views, further studies are needed to ascertain the conditions that trigger drug dependency in the community.40 While more information is needed in order to make an informed policy on substance dependency, there is some evidence pointing to which substances are widely abused in GCC countries. First, clinical reports suggest that solvent misuse is extensive although no formal studies have been conducted. Hafeiz41 has suggested that abuse of solvents often occurs in order to overcome the boredom of modern living. There is also increasing evidence to suggest that some of these agents cause mental disorders42 as well as neurological complications.43 The chemicals in question include glues, liquid shoe polish, deodoriser, petrol, cologne and insecticides.44,45 A special pattern of substance dependency associated with social deviancy and delinquency also involves a home-made mixture of dates and ointments as well as inhalation of intoxicating fumes derived from burning the wings of cockroaches and ants with volatile substances. Habitual inhaling of these substances is often associated with a failure to thrive.42 Secondly, inhaling smoke derived from nicotine based substances is now common in many GCC countries.46,47 Tobacco is often chewed, snuffed or smoked either in cigarettes or in sheesha. The latter (also known as hookah) is a smoking device, widely used in some communities of the Arabian Peninsula, to smoke jurak, a cooked tobacco-fruit mixture, and burnt by an electrical device or by charcoal. The produced smoke passes through the water at the base of the sheesha and then a long-tube before it is inhaled. Though most smokers consider sheesha less harmful to health than cigarette smoking,48 this has not been substantiated in regional studies.48,49 Experimental and clinical studies have found that nicotine, an active ingredient of both sheesha and cigarettes, not only triggers cardiovascular diseases, but also predisposes frequent users to various neuropsychiatric disorders.50 The question remains whether smoking triggers mental illness or people with mental illness are more likely to smoke.51 Pharmacological studies have unequivocally shown that nicotine is as addictive as other well-known psychoactive drugs such as cocaine and amphetamines.52 However, GCC countries have given a low priority to this a public health issue. Demand for nicotine has been falling in industrialised nations, 53 but a similar picture is not emerging from middle and low income countries. Cigarette companies are now targeting the developing world.53 Moreover, cigarette companies are manufacturing products of differing quality for sale in different markets. It has been shown that cigarettes of the same brand sold in developing countries have higher tar content than in the country of origin.54 Some studies have suggested that certain cigarettes are made from more potent, hence, more addictive, nicotine.53,55 As there is no known effective program to educate people about the dangers of smoking, prevention and smoking cessation appear to an unattainable goals. To compound the problem, some proponents of the "gateway phenomenon" suggest that smoking is a springboard to hard drugs such as cocaine and heroin, 56 though there is also evidence to contradict this view.57 The social problems precipitated by alcoholism have not yet been reported in the GCC countries though some reports suggest that drinking problems are proliferating.13,44,58 The World Health Organisation59 estimates that more then 5 million people are disabled because of alcohol use, making it the fourth leading cause of worldwide disability. Theobald has suggested that approximately 0% of alcohol consumers will at some time experience serious health problems related to their drinking habit.60 As many individuals are now facing the daily challenges of modern living and the pressures of modern life, alcohol abuse is thought to be one of the elusive antidotes to modern insecurity.17 Some recent findings suggest that individuals who have a high subjective level of insecurity in their lives are likely to abuse alcohol to ward of their psychosocial stress. Interestingly, people with such attributes have been seen to have refractory types of alcoholism.61 Alcohol syndromes such as delirium tremens and Korsakoff's psychosis are known to occur among people who consume it regularly.50 Persons at risk of drinking problems cannot be reliably identified in the population; therefore the pattern of drinking and its psychosocial correlates are indicated for the GCC countries. The bulk of the studies21,45,58 have focused solely on exploring the validity of research instruments on cross-cultural application of drinking attitude and behaviour. Little is known on the effect of alcohol repackaged as "cologne" available in some GCC countries.62,63 Colognes or ethyl alcohol-containing perfume and after-shave are sometimes ingested as an alcohol substitute.64 Relevant to this, it would be important to determine whether the availability of alcohol and other soft drugs deters people from going into narcotics that are more dangerous. One suggestion is that in those societies of GCC where there is a relaxed attitude towards alcohol, there are fewer propensities towards heroin and other dangerous drugs.14 It also not clear how such information would be helpful in planning intervention programs in GCC countries, as the experiences from other societies suggest a complex relationship between alcohol and substance abuse. The "gateway theory" would suggest that using alcohol leads people to use harder drugs like cocaine and heroin.65 There is also scant information on the pattern and psychosocial correlates of over-the-counter medications in the GCC countries. Though generally viewed as harmless, many of them have the potential for abuse, particular those that are considered to be amphetamine-like stimulants.66 These includes nasal decongestants, bronchodilators, appetite suppressants and energy pills and drinks. While there is no evidence to suggest that cocaine and hallucinogens are widely consumed in the GCC countries, 13 the story of opiate use is somewhat different. Historical documents suggest that opium was considered as a medicinal substance in the Middle East. It was recommended by various towering Arab figures such as Ibn Sina.1 More recently, however, its semi-synthetic counterpart, heroin, far removed from its cultural context, is becoming the drug of choice for addicts in the GCC countries. Being close to heroin producing regions of the world, GCC appears to be the trafficker's place of choice. Being capable of causing compulsive dependency within a short time, heroin has a devastating effect on the user and society in general. To those who are addicted to heroin, it appears the habit leaves them little time for meaningful life. To compound the problem, as 90% of GCC heroin addicts use it intravenously, sharing of contaminated needles causes infections of human immune deficiency virus and a high incidence of other infections.33 Similarly, the number of cases of heroin addiction is often directly related to the number of crimes.27 Despite stringent regulations to reduce the supply and demand, the habit proliferates. Judging from the quantities of drugs seized by the authorities, the last decade has witnessed a dramatic increase in the number of cases of heroin addiction, the number of addicts seeking rehabilitation, and death due to heroin overdose.PROSPECTS FOR THE FUTURE Rehabilitation for addiction is often in the hands of psychiatric or penitentiary services though some specialised centres have emerged in some GCC countries.16 Culturally sensitive interventions seem to be often relegated to fringe importance. Medical interventions are likely to grow considering the many claims about new pharmacological tools that take advantage of the chemical properties of alcohol and other drugs. However, drug treatment for substance dependency should not hold up the search for psychosocial predisposing factors, which, in turn, could be a springboard for educational strategies to reduce demand. Indeed, blind adherence to pharmacological intervention not only seems similar to drug peddling, but also may be counterproductive in the long term. A biomedical explanatory model of substance dependency may lead to stigma, and lessen the individual and societal accountability in tackling compulsive dependency. Stressing personal responsibility, on the other hand, motivates one to change, as well as help one understand the challenges ahead and evolve coping mechanisms.67 As distress and stress are experienced in a socio-cultural context, rehabilitation services should avoid committing what Kleinman has called a "category fallacy", where a view of human nature developed for one cultural group is uncritically applied to members of another group for whom its validity has not been established.68 According to Kleinman, this results in a "distortion of pathology" rather than a critical understanding of the ways in which the members of a different cultural group perceive, experience and communicates beliefs and distress. One of the essential grounds for formulating enlightened policies toward drug dependency is to consider the society's outlook towards mood altering substances. Despite the documented frequency of substance abuse in GCC countries, a review of the literature reveals no objective studies on knowledge, attitude and perception. Opinion towards substance dependency among citizens of GCC countries is likely to have a wide-ranging influence, affecting issues as diverse as personal consequences of substance dependency, prevention, care and management of people with substance abuse. Historical and cross-cultural studies have suggested that individuals with substance dependence are likely to encounter active discrimination and harassment which, in turn, exacerbates their psychosocial predicament and perpetuates their relapse into drug taking.37 Similarly, it has been suggested that social attitudes can be more devastating than the addiction itself, and the addict's family suffers as well.69 Although many victims of substance dependency could benefit from treatment, attitudes of society towards them is likely to hamper their seeking rehabilitation. As a result, many are likely to stay underground until addiction has reached an advanced stage of irreversible pathology. This not only increases pessimism of the victims and those around them but also shatters the prospect of recovery. Therefore, more research in GCC countries should be conducted in order to shed light on socio-cultural factors that precipitate individuals to succumb to substance abuse. This would open the door for contemplating strategies to achieve a reasonable level of prevention as well as to prioritise which aspects of services are pertinent to the region. Grinspoon and Bakalar have suggested that of all the mistakes repeated, the most serious is trying to free society of drugs via legislation and regulation.70 Indeed, many studies1 suggest that no punitive measure deters availability and abuse of drugs.14 It appears that financial gain is one of the strongest determining factors. Globally, though consensus from the experts in the field suggests that substance dependency is a disease, public opinion often considers it a form of moral degeneracy that can destroy social values. As a result, victims of substance dependency are sent to the prison. Many countries have pursued the idea of creating a national consensus towards zero tolerance for substance abuse and death penalty for drug traffickers. The policies fluctuate between curbing trafficking, reducing demand and decriminalisation of certain classes of drugs.71 Some countries have considered decriminalizing soft drugs and the debate continues on the rationale of dispensing heroin to heroin-addicts.72 Although more time is needed to assess the long-term outcome of these new programs, history has shown that none of the previous campaigns to curb the spread of substance misuse has worked. Instead, the situation appears to be summed up in Bob Marley's lyric, "So you think you have found the solution; But it's just another illusion". CONCLUSION The problem of drug abuse in the GCC is a multi-dimensional one without easy solutions. This paper has touched upon several of these issues. Even though for zero tolerance to substance dependency is advocated, no program has been found to be universally successful in reducing drug dependence. Historically, many societies have tried both criminalisation and decriminalisation but to no avail. Despite all the technologies to monitor and legal authority to bring the drug traffickers to justice,including the threat of death penalty, dealing with substances that cause addiction is becoming a global challenge of ever increasing magnitude. More discouraging, the problem has even affected societies where one would expect cultural factors to protect them from the attraction of drugs. The purpose of this paper, thus, is to "point a finger to the moon", the moon symbolising the complexity of substance dependency. One should not confuse the moon with the finger that points to it.

.The subject of my thesis has as its starting point a didactic aim: that of the qualitative improvement of the teaching/learning of French to/from an audience of Reunionese children. In pursuit of this goal, I have set myself the goal of developing a benchmark for assessing the morphosyntactic skills of children in Reunion Island's large kindergarten section. Enriched in particular by recent research related to the theme of the contact of languages in Creolo-French-speaking lands, my work as a didactician has tried to reconcile, or at least to confront, a sociolinguistic variationist posture with that, classically more structuralist, of a grammarian "standard-setter" in a school setting. I thus deal, from a theoretical and pragmatic point of view, with the problem of a binarized grammatical evaluation, in a diglostic context of close language contacts, where interlectal practices are legion. By considering, from a holistic perspective, questions relating to the development of reference standards and the collection of oral data from small non-reading schoolchildren, my research is actually at the crossroads of sociolinguistics, language didactics, educational sciences but also psycholinguistics and descriptive linguistics. The report of my work is divided into four parts. PART 1: Following a general introduction, the first part of my typed text shows the need for an assessment of the linguistic skills of Réunionese pupils at the end of nursery school. It also describes the general objectives, postures and intentions underlying this evaluation. The gap between the language of the school and the language of the home is considered on Reunion Island as an aggravating factor in the educational difficulties encountered by many Reunionese pupils from the very beginning of their schooling. It would seem that to become good readers, many of them do not have sufficient skills as speakers of the French language. Among the remediation proposals proposed so far by researchers who have dealt with the subject, it is often recommended that the skills acquired by students in Creole, considered their L1, be used as a basis from kindergarten onwards to compose a strategy for teaching French as a second language. Recently, the educational policies officially posted for the Academy also suggest, in a more or less vague way, the need to take into account Creole. In this perspective, which is certainly commendable if one refers to the work of didacticians and psycholinguists on strong forms of teaching in a bilingual context (e.g. Baker, Hamers and Blanc, Cummins), two central questions nevertheless appear which should therefore be raised, but which until now have hardly been asked: -What is the quality of Creole spoken by "Creole" children today? Do the little schoolchildren from Reunion, and especially those who encounter difficulties in French, really master Creole? The analysis of recent sociolinguistic works relating to language contacts and the expansion of the use of interlecte in the Reunionese community (Prudent, Ledegen, Watin, Souprayen-Cavery, Rapanoël.).), taking into account the remarks of local primary school teachers on the shortcomings of young pupils not only in French but also in Creole, and the results of surveys declaring an increase in the "transmission" of French by Reunionese mothers, led me to think that doubt on this subject is permitted or at least that the assumption "Creole L1" is to be qualified. In order to better situate the purpose and goal of my work, I therefore began by demonstrating that the situation in terms of language practices is complex and, consequently, that the didactic orientations would become more sensitive and anchored in the local situation if they were based on concrete points of reference concerning the actual degree of mastery of the two codes in question by the students. How, in fact, can we claim to be able to exploit the knowledge acquired in one language (a priori L1-créole) in order to better appropriate the other (a priori L2-français), without having taken full measure of the degree of mastery of the two languages involved? While work has begun on the communicative skills of kindergarten students (Fioux and Marimoutou), my research on local "assessments" conducted so far reveals that researchers have no relatively detailed assessment of the current language skills of Reunionese children, on the one hand in French, before the transition to written French, after three years of schooling explicitly focused on acquiring the basics of oral French, and on the other hand in Creole. Equally disconcerting, given the educational challenges, it appears that there are also no assessment tools designed for the local situation, and therefore adapted for the collection and analysis of these oral language skills among young children, whereas we are in a former French colony with a sociolinguistic situation rooted in diglossia. On what basis can we then rely to affirm that the Reunionese students of today, who are referred to en masse as "Creolophones", possess solid language skills in Creole and gaps in French when they engage in the systematic process of learning to read? It is on the basis of these questions and observations that I draft a first constituency of the objective of my work. It is a question of asking the prolegomena of an assessment assessment, linguistic, comparative, in Creole and French, whose methodological foundations would be explained, argued, but also contextualized and updated for a public of learners at the end of a large nursery section in Reunion. The aim is to provide teachers of languages working for and with small schoolchildren in Reunion with a tool that is sufficiently detailed to enrich reflection on French teaching/learning strategies, "possibly" based on the knowledge of these pupils in Creole. Although the delimitations I am proposing to establish are an integral part of the evaluation process, they are upstream of the act of evaluation. More specifically, it is a question of building an operational evaluation frame of reference presenting evaluation criteria, reference standards and pre-tested tests with a sample of children of large section, in French and Creole. Once this purpose has been clarified, I set the initial parameters of this evaluation process. Understanding it above all as "a reflection on relationships to values", I then position myself, after an epistemological approach to this not insignificant act, in favour of an evaluation that makes sense. Following in particular Hadji, Lecointe, Bonniol and Vial or Ardoino and Berger on their questioning of the technicality of docimology in search of an illusory objectivity, I undertake, like them, to shift the priority of the correctness of the results towards the logic and transparency of an objectivized process, leading to a relevant result that can be understood, located, relativized according to a transparent reading grid and the intentions underlying it. To do this, I then borrow from the educational sciences, and in particular G. Figari, the concept of referentialization, with its triple status, operational, methodological and scientific. If they were originally designed to carry out evaluations of systems (schools, training systems, curricula, etc.), I show that the general principles of referentialisation are in fact entirely transposable to the study I am conducting. Having this common thread, my referentialization begins, in a first step, with a work of reflexivity, to try to explain and situate my own posture as an evaluation designer, which engages me in an ethical responsibility. It is above all a question of taking a step back from the power held and to which I am subjected in this work of gathering and using information of social value. I therefore strive to pose and understand the social and individual issues related to this act, but also, in reference to the subjectivity inherent in any research in the humanities (de Robillard), to self-position myself in relation to my own representations and inclinations regarding the choice of a referentialization activity. A second step arising from the first also allows me to clarify my intentions in this evaluation. After a review of the pathways available to me, I conclude that in relation to the objectives, they are closer to evaluation-appraisal than evaluation-measurement and lead me to favour a qualitative approach. PART 2: The second part of my thesis, which relates the exploratory phase of my referentialization, is entirely dedicated to the modelling stage of my evaluation object. First, I report on the theoretical investigations I conducted in order to define the object to be evaluated, namely the object language. The first step is to position myself in the debate on the (im)possibility(s) of delimiting boundaries between Creole and French, which opposes structuralists and variationists, and even variationists between them. To do this, I approach the history of the contact of the languages of Reunion, from the plantation society to the departmentalized society, and compare the concepts that served as filters to describe the contact of Creole/French languages (diglossia, continuum, interlecte, macrosystem). Finally, I come to find in de Robillard's arguments, in his broader reflection on the definition of a language, the bases that push me to adopt, for the precise needs of the evaluation I am aiming for, a solid conception of the language, leading me to see Creole and French from a binarized angle. For all that, I do not abandon the study of the phenomena of mixtures noted by the Reunionese teachers among their pupils and that some (didacticians and pedagogues) praise as an asset or, on the contrary, criticize as a handicap, or even associate with the manifestation of a "semi-linguism", compared to the speeches of monolinguals. If my inclination for sociolinguistics leads me to see mixtures as some kind of discursive mode in their linguistic repertoire and to refute a treatment of mixtures from the point of view of parasitages, the question I ask myself as a didactician seeking to improve the teaching/learning process of French is the following: in the end, how can evaluators be allowed to determine, independently of recognition of the linguistic and pragmatic ability of these young pupils to "juggle" with two codes to arrive at communicating, whether the mixtures made are indicative of a) tactics of "compensating" for gaps in one language and/or the other (the skills then being better in one language than the other or insufficient in both languages), or b) relatively good "mastery" of the two codes (the skills being good in one language as well as the other), which calls for different remediation and/or teaching methods? With this in mind, I have decided to draw up an inventory of research focused on the language and linguistic evaluation of "bilingual" people. I am particularly interested in the treatment of the problem of mixtures, from the most "closed" (cf. the works of Titone, Fioux, Genelot et al.), to the most "open" (cf. the works of Moore, Cavalli, Stubbe and Peña.). By weighing them against my objectives, it seems to me that, for my type of comparative assessment, requiring quite distinct target languages, the binarized approach that can answer my initial questions proves to be relevant. Continuing my theoretical investigations, I refine my research framework by determining what a good speaker of a language implies. By approaching the notions of competence vs performance, by reviewing the points of view of language didacticians (Canale and Swain, De Pietro, Cuq, Beacco, Springer, Castellotti,.), interactionists (Hymes, Vasseur), psycholinguists (Lentin, Florin, Gombert.), pedagogues (Boisseau), researchers specializing in language evaluation (Rondal, Comblain, Piérart, Muller.).), but also by taking into consideration the directives concerning the mastery of language (Ministry of National Education) and the recommendations concerning the appropriation of foreign languages (Council of Europe), I decide to focus my reference frame on the evaluation of morphosyntactic skills, and to privilege as well the collection of samples of induced language as of spontaneous language. My exploratory phase also includes field investigations. I begin by describing the places of investigation (located mainly among Benedictine pupils of large nursery section but also at Tampon and Pau), the sampling (choice of schools, classes, children) and the means I used (ethnological approach, filmed interactions, activities carried out, protocols followed). In addition to providing me with a better knowledge of the characteristics of these young witnesses, thanks in particular to a participant observation, and to testing the relevance of different supports, tasks, evaluation approaches and inter-electoral speech transcription systems, I show that this field work allows me to make several observations that corroborate the hypothesis I had formulated during my theoretical investigations. By crossing various salient factors that I was able to identify, such as language practices (which I label without hierarchy "bi-linguisme", "mix-linguisme", "dominance in Creole" and "dominance in French"), linguistic representations, attitudes towards the school norm and the ability to discriminate between the two linguistic codes, both by the witnesses and by myself in the role of evaluator, I was indeed able to measure, in parallel with promising results, the complexity and the limits of a binarized evaluation in terms of data collection and analysis, particularly when the evaluator is faced with certain language profiles of children in this context of close language contact. Indeed, if a binary apprehension, deliberately and "classically" smoothed for teaching purposes seems appropriate for assessing and comparing the quality of children's skills in Creole and French, the local context of contact of close languages, marked by diglossic representations and far from being limited to well delimited and delimitable binary practices, leads me to think that a reference of this type is likely to have a limited scope. It is a hypothesis that it will then be up to me to verify in the continuation of my work. PART 3: Informed by a better knowledge of the potential, limits and concrete constraints of a binarised approach, the next stage of my referentialisation begins with the choice of criteria and indicators that will make it possible to evaluate young children who are not readers, orally, in French and Creole. This is the subject of the third part of my typewriting. Before getting to the heart of the matter, I begin with an indispensable preamble, it seems to me, on the balance of power at stake in normative activity (between prescription and description, priorities, relativity and arbitrariness, legitimacy(ies).). On this sensitive subject, subject to strong polemics, as well in the scientific community in general as among speakers evolving in the Reunionese community, I present in a double posture of sociolinguist and didactician, my own positioning in relation to the notion of "norm(s)". In order for my approach to be better understood and because I consider it essential to step back from a concept that often marginalizes those who use it (outside practitioners), I explicitly state the relative, constructed and yet necessary character, in my case, of the standard for this frame of reference. I also explain my legitimacy as a designer of normative references from a variationist point of view, within the theoretical framework chosen for this evaluation work. To construct the normative references of my tool, the methodological protocol that I decide to borrow is the following: 1. from already recorded descriptions of uses, - in Creole (then exist only scientific articles, grammars, dictionaries that describe only the norms of adult use (Staudacher, Watbled, Chaudenson, Ramassamy, Cellier.)), - and in French (including work on standard French (Riegel et al., Arrivé et al.)), Wagner and Pinchon.), spoken French (Gadet, Blanche-Benvéniste, Sauvageot.), regional French (Carayol, Ledegen, Béniamino and Baggioni), French spoken by children (Florin, Boisseau, Comblain.), 2. synthesize and compare these works, not only with each other but also with my own research and native speaker skills on the morphosyntactic items in question, 3.in order to be able to then proceed to a choice of criteria, whose relevance will be justified each time, for the language provoked and the spontaneous language, 4. to propose reference standards (indicators) making it possible to evaluate these criteria. For Creole, at this stage it is a question of provisional standards, 5. adjusting and updating the latter for an audience of young children, by analysing the spontaneous speech in Creole of Reunionese kindergarten children ("reference informants"), dominant in Creole or in two languages. A little more than three hundred pages of my typewriting report on the development and choice of these criteria and indicators. They quickly reveal a clear qualitative and quantitative imbalance between the state of knowledge in Creole and French. In a grammatical work, descriptive but also prescriptive, which must sort and complete, for Creole, existing descriptions certainly interesting but often contradictory, relieved of emerging varieties and completely incomplete as regards child forms, I approach the updating of the verbal theme (flexional system, analytical system, index i, truncation rules), personal pronouns, the valence of verbal themes, interrogative modality and negative modality. PART 4: The fourth and last part of my referentialization is first devoted to measuring the general parameters of designing assessment tasks and collecting data for and from children. Following a review of the literature on the subject (notably the work of Rondal, Moreau and Richelle, Khomsi, Florin, Brédart, Gombert, Marquillo.), I then put forward two considerations relating to relevance and validity criteria in an evaluation, when collecting data. They concern the types of activities generally proposed in language assessments (comprehension, production, detection and correction of statements), and the tasks making it possible to collect observable behaviours (with a focus on their scope, bias, supports and instructions). I close this review with my own remarks, criticisms and impressions on the experience of developing data collection tools that I was able to develop on the ground in Réunion. In a second step, I present and comment on the pilot tests I pre-tested with a hundred children of large section, during individual evaluation sessions, filmed and analyzed. This test bank is composed of 39 sheets classified according to whether it is a question of assessing competencies in Creole, competencies in French or "bilingual" competencies (translation, codic discrimination). These sheets present the evaluation tasks I have developed and pre-tested for feasibility, relevance and sensitivity. They detail, for each syntactic item evaluated, the criteria taken into consideration, the type of activity chosen, the expected performances, the supports of the test, the indications on its organisation, the instructions, but also the primer statements possibly provided for the evaluator, an analysis of examples of "correct" and "incorrect" answers collected from the pre-tested witnesses, and finally general comments on the test in question (difficulties, variants, precautions.). CONCLUSION: my typewriting ends with a general conclusion. First of all, it summarizes the different steps of my referencing as well as their results, and comes back on the improvements that could be made. It then presents the contributions of this research work, which also raises questions and allows proposals to be made. The contributions include in particular : -Theoretical but also field research with a hundred Reunionese children which allows the provision of an operational assessment tool, adapted to the characteristics of small Reunionese schoolchildren of large nursery section and proposing detailed tasks, tested and concrete normative benchmarks. These cards can be used as they stand, in the end as much by researchers in language didactics as by practitioners, who assess the oral grammatical skills of young children in Reunion Island. - In general, a methodological perspective concerning the collection and analysis of oral data from young non-reading schoolchildren in a diglostic context, and in a situation of contact with nearby languages. - An enrichment of the work of synchronic description of the peripheral French morphosyntax, but especially of the Creole of Reunion Island, in particular, a) by taking into account the intrasystemic and intersystemic variations (the current emerging forms due to the internal dynamics of Creole and to the contact with French, the childlike forms, the language of the young people), b) by the synthetic approach adopted (comparative analysis of work, elaboration of summary tables). But this work of referentialization also raises questions for research, on several points: On the didactic level : - This study showing the essential consideration of linguistic representations, language practices, pragmatic skills of students during the process of collecting oral data, what validity, what relevance can have smoothed evaluations, hermetic to the situation of contact of close languages and the specificities of children in Reunion, such as academic evaluations in French, duplications of a-contextualized metropolitan evaluations, designed for an already French-speaking monolingual public? What relevance do the proposals of didactic and explicit use, "as is", of Creole "L1" as a springboard to reach French L2, whereas the pre-tests carried out during my research already show a majority of witnesses presenting basic grammatical skills in French deficiencies, but also schoolchildren (even dominant Creolophones), encountering difficulties of expression, even comprehension, in Creole? Wouldn't most of the grammatical descriptions currently available hardly take into account the intra- and intersystemic variations of Creole, have repercussions on the scope of the didactic proposals for teaching French in partnership with Creole?In terms of research on language assessment: -The binary perspective chosen in this work, considered relevant for comparing language skills in Creole and French, has limitations and cannot, in particular, take into consideration, as it stands, all children's language profiles (for example, non-discriminatory mix-linguals). Beyond a Creole/French assessment, what alternative do we have to assess the language skills, especially morpho-syntactic, of these children whose (a)meshed speech and without a target "language" cannot be analysed in this framework? Should these "bilingual" skills be measured for themselves, without reference to Creole and French, as some researchers try to do relatively marginally in other linguistic contexts (e.g. Stubbe and Peña for American-Hispanic bilinguals in the United States)? But is what seems possible for "non collateral" languages possible for genetically and structurally related languages? Indeed, is a bilingual evaluation taking as a normative reference the morphosyntax of the entire Reunion macrosystem, thus a "fluid" language, where the evaluator does not have explicit/explicable reference standards a priori and therefore justified/justifiable, conceivable? Although it allows its pedagogical relevance to be seen, and meets the search for meaning criterion, how would it justify its objectivization when the evaluator only"feels" that it is being said and thus holds within himself "moving" rules, elusive as a native speaker of the interlecte? How can this unavoidable involvement, which derogates from the basis of any evaluation, be managed when normative references are internalized and a priori not externalisable?This research work finally makes it possible to make recommendations and proposals for areas of work concerning the teaching of French in partnership with Creole: - To endeavour to identify the conditions of awareness of codes by currently discriminating children (without school guidance), for the study of ways allowing schoolchildren, from the small section, to discriminate prototypical traits of Creole and French. - To take greater account of the heterogeneity of the language profiles of Réunionese children, who should not be considered as a linguistically homogeneous mass (even in schools in so-called disadvantaged neighbourhoods), and to continue the reflection on taking into account the Reunionese language macrosystem. – To complete the research on Creole currently spoken by the Reunionese population (children, youth, adults) and open these descriptions to all variations. - To make current the grammatical description books and to encourage the publication of scientific works (not purist), "accessible" to the public of students (future teachers) in training but also to that of teachers already in post. – To take more into account and change the negative representations of the local population (especially the parents of pupils) concerning the partnership (direct or indirect) with Creole. This subject being the object of strong tensions on the school ground, to study possibilities of alternative approaches (exploitation of the television medium, creation/exploitation of parallel educational structures as associations of the "ti lékol maron" type or leisure centres), privileging the mastery of language with a playful aspect, in a "calmed" context. ; Le sujet de ma thèse a pour point de départ une visée didactique : celle de l'amélioration qualitative de l'enseignement/apprentissage du français à/par un public d'enfants réunionnais. Dans la poursuite de cette finalité, je me suis fixé pour but l'élaboration d'un référentiel d'évaluation des compétences morphosyntaxiques d'enfants réunionnais en grande section de maternelle à La Réunion. Enrichi notamment des récentes recherches liées à la thématique du contact de langues en terres créolo-francophones, mon travail de didacticienne a tenté de concilier, ou du moins de confronter une posture de sociolinguiste variationniste à celle, classiquement plus structuraliste, de grammairienne « poseuse de normes » dans un cadre scolaire. Je traite ainsi, d'un point de vue théorique et pragmatique, la problématique d'une évaluation grammaticale binarisée, dans un contexte diglossique de contacts de langues proches, où les pratiques interlectales sont légion. En considérant, dans une perspective holistique, des questions relatives à l'élaboration de normes de référence et au recueil de données orales auprès de petits écoliers non lecteurs, ma recherche se trouve en réalité inscrite à la croisée de la sociolinguistique, de la didactique des langues, des sciences de l'éducation mais aussi de la psycholinguistique et de la linguistique descriptive.Le compte rendu de mon travail se scinde en quatre parties.PARTIE 1 : suite à une introduction générale, la première partie de mon tapuscrit montre la nécessité d'une évaluation bilan des compétences linguistiques des élèves réunionnais à la fin de l'école maternelle. Elle décrit également les objectifs généraux, les postures et les intentions qui sous-tendent cette évaluation.L'écart entre la langue de l'école et la langue de la maison est considéré à La Réunion comme un facteur aggravant des difficultés scolaires que rencontrent de nombreux élèves réunionnais dès les débuts de leur scolarisation. Il semblerait que pour devenir notamment de bons lecteurs, beaucoup d'entre eux ne disposent pas de compétences suffisantes en tant que locuteurs de la langue française. Parmi les propositions de remédiation proposées jusqu'à présent par les chercheurs ayant traité du sujet, il est souvent préconisé de prendre appui, dès la maternelle, sur les compétences acquises par les élèves en créole, considéré comme leur L1, pour composer une stratégie d'enseignement du français, qualifiée de langue seconde. Depuis peu, les politiques éducatives officiellement affichées pour l'Académie laissent entendre également à leur tour, de manière plus ou moins floue, la nécessité de prendre en compte le créole.Dans cette optique, certes louable si on se réfère à des travaux de didacticiens et de psycholinguistes sur les formes fortes d'enseignement en contexte bilingue (ex : Baker, Hamers et Blanc, Cummins), apparaissent cependant deux questions centrales qui devraient dès lors être soulevées, mais qui jusqu'à présent n'ont guère été posées : -Quelle est la qualité du créole parlé par les enfants « créolophones » d'aujourd'hui ?-Ces petits écoliers réunionnais, et notamment ceux qui rencontrent des difficultés en français, maîtrisent-ils vraiment le créole ? L'analyse des récents travaux de sociolinguistique ayant trait aux contacts de langues et à l'expansion de l'usage de l'interlecte dans la communauté réunionnaise (Prudent, Ledegen, Watin, Souprayen-Cavery, Rapanoël.), la prise en compte des remarques d'enseignants locaux du premier degré sur les lacunes des jeunes élèves non seulement en français mais également en créole, et celle des résultats de sondages déclarant une augmentation de la « transmission » du français par les mères réunionnaises, m'ont amenée à penser que le doute à ce sujet est permis ou du moins que le postulat « créole L1 » est à nuancer. Afin de mieux situer la finalité et le but de mon travail, j'ai donc entrepris dans un premier temps de démontrer que la donne en matière de pratiques langagières s'avère complexe et par conséquent, que les orientations didactiques gagneraient en sensibilité et en ancrage dans la situation locale, si elles s'appuyaient sur des points de repères concrets concernant le degré de maîtrise effective actuelle des deux codes en question par les élèves. Comment, en effet, prétendre pouvoir exploiter les acquis dans une langue (a priori L1-créole) pour mieux s'approprier l'autre (a priori L2-français), sans avoir pris la pleine mesure du degré de maîtrise des deux langues impliquées? Si des travaux ont été entamés concernant les compétences communicatives des écoliers en maternelle (Fioux et Marimoutou), mes recherches sur les « évaluations » locales menées jusque-là révèlent en effet que les chercheurs ne disposent d'aucun bilan relativement détaillé des compétences linguistiques actuelles des enfants réunionnais, d'une part en français, avant le passage au français écrit, après trois années de scolarisation pourtant explicitement axées sur l'acquisition des bases du français oral, et d'autre part en créole . Tout aussi déconcertant, eu égard aux enjeux scolaires, il apparaît qu'on ne dispose pas non plus d'outils d'évaluation pensés pour la situation locale, donc adaptés pour le recueil et l'analyse de ces compétences linguistiques orales auprès de jeunes enfants, alors qu'on se trouve dans une ancienne colonie française présentant une situation sociolinguistique ancrée dans la diglossie. Sur quelle base peut-on alors s'appuyer pour affirmer que les élèves réunionnais d'aujourd'hui, qu'on qualifie en masse de « créolophones », possèdent de solides compétences linguistiques en créole et des lacunes en français lorsqu'ils s'engagent dans le processus d'apprentissage systématique de la lecture ? C'est à partir de ces questionnements et de ces constats que j'ébauche une première circonscription de l'objectif de mon travail. Il s'agit de poser les prolégomènes d'une évaluation bilan, linguistique, comparée, en créole et en français, dont les soubassements méthodologiques seraient explicités, argumentés, mais aussi contextualisés et actualisés pour un public d'apprenants en fin de grande section de maternelle à La Réunion. Le but est de doter les didacticiens des langues œuvrant pour et auprès de petits écoliers réunionnais d'un outil suffisamment fin pour permettre d'enrichir la réflexion sur les stratégies d'enseignement/apprentissage du français, « éventuellement » à partir des acquis de ces élèves en créole. Bien que s'inscrivant en amont de l'acte d'évaluer, les délimitations que je propose d'établir font partie intégrante du processus d'évaluation. Plus précisément, il s'agit concrètement de construire un référentiel d'évaluation opérationnel présentant des critères d'évaluation, des normes de références et des épreuves pré-testées auprès d'un échantillon d'enfants de grande section, en français et en créole. Une fois ce dessein explicité, je pose les paramètres liminaires de ce processus d'évaluation. Le concevant avant tout comme « une réflexion sur les rapports aux valeurs », je me positionne alors, après une approche épistémologique de cet acte non anodin, en faveur d'une évaluation qui fasse sens. Suivant notamment Hadji, Lecointe, Bonniol et Vial ou encore Ardoino et Berger sur leurs remises en cause de la technicité de la docimologie à la recherche d'une objectivité illusoire, j'entreprends, comme eux, de déplacer la priorité de la justesse des résultats vers la logique et la transparence d'un processus objectivisé, amenant à un résultat pertinent qu'on peut comprendre, situer, relativiser en fonction d'une grille de lecture transparente et des intentions qui la sous-tendent. Pour ce faire, j'emprunte alors aux sciences de l'éducation, et notamment à G. Figari, le concept de référentialisation, au triple statut, opératoire, méthodologique et scientifique. S'ils ont été pensés originellement pour mener des évaluations de dispositifs (établissements scolaires, dispositifs de formation, curricula, etc.), je montre que les principes généraux de la référentialisation s'avèrent en réalité tout à fait transposables à l'étude que je mène. Nantie de ce fil rouge, ma référentialisation commence, dans une première étape, par un travail de réflexivité, pour tenter d'expliciter et situer ma propre posture de conceptrice d'évaluation, qui m'engage dans une responsabilité éthique. Il s'agit avant tout de prendre du recul sur le pouvoir détenu et auquel je suis soumise dans ce travail de recueil et d'utilisation d'une information à valeur sociale. Je m'attèle donc à poser et comprendre les enjeux sociaux et individuels liés à cet acte, mais également, en référence à la subjectivité inhérente à toute recherche en sciences humaines (de Robillard), à m'auto-positionner par rapport à mes propres représentations et inclinations concernant le choix d'une activité de référentialisation. Une deuxième étape découlant de la première me permet par ailleurs de préciser mes intentions dans cette évaluation. Après une revue des cheminements qui me sont offerts, j'en conclus qu'en rapport avec les objectifs visés, celles-ci se rapprochent au final plus de l'évaluation-appréciation que de l'évaluation-mesure et m'amènent à privilégier une approche qualitative.PARTIE 2 : la deuxième partie de ma thèse, qui relate la phase exploratoire de ma référentialisation, est entièrement dédiée à l'étape de la modélisation de mon objet d'évaluation. Je rends tout d'abord compte des investigations théoriques que j'ai menées afin de circonscrire l'objet à évaluer, à savoir l'objet langue. Il s'agit dans un premier temps de me positionner dans le débat sur la/les (im)possibilité(s) de délimitation de frontières entre créole et français, qui oppose structuralistes et variationnistes, et même variationnistes entre eux. J'aborde, pour ce faire, l'histoire du contact des langues de La Réunion, de la société de plantation à la société départementalisée, et confronte les concepts qui ont servi de filtres pour décrire le contact de langues créole/français (diglossie, continuum, interlecte, macrosystème). J'en viens finalement à trouver dans les arguments de de Robillard, dans sa réflexion plus large sur la définition d'une langue, les bases qui me poussent à adopter, pour les besoins précis de l'évaluation que je vise, une conception solide de la langue, amenant à voir le créole et le français sous un angle binarisé.Pour autant, je n'abandonne pas l'étude des phénomènes de mélanges relevés par les enseignants réunionnais chez leurs élèves et que d'aucuns (didacticiens et pédagogues) encensent comme un atout ou, au contraire, fustigent comme un handicap, voire associent à la manifestation d'un « semi-linguisme », comparativement aux discours de monolingues. Si mon inclination pour la sociolinguistique m'amène à voir les mélanges comme un quelconque mode discursif dans leur répertoire langagier et à réfuter un traitement des mélanges du point de vue de parasitages, la question que je me pose en tant que didacticienne cherchant à améliorer le processus d'enseignement/apprentissage du français est la suivante : en fin de compte, comment permettre à des évaluateurs de déterminer, indépendamment d'une reconnaissance de la capacité linguistique et pragmatique de ces jeunes élèves à "jongler" avec deux codes pour arriver à communiquer, si les mélanges effectués sont indicateurs :-de tactiques de « compensation » de lacunes dans l'une et/ou l'autre langue (les compétences étant alors meilleures dans une langue que dans l'autre ou insuffisantes dans les deux langues),-ou d'une « maîtrise » relativement bonne des deux codes (les compétences étant bonnes dans une langue comme dans l'autre), ce qui appelle des remédiations et/ou des pistes pédagogiques différentes ? Je décide dans cette optique d'établir l'état des lieux des recherches axées sur l'évaluation langagière et linguistique de « bilingues ». Je m'intéresse notamment aux traitements de la problématique des mélanges, des plus « fermés » (cf. les travaux de Titone, Fioux, Genelot et al.), aux plus « ouverts » (cf. les travaux de Moore, Cavalli, Stubbe et Peña.). En les soupesant en regard de mes objectifs, il m'apparaît alors que, pour mon type d'évaluation comparée, requérant des langues cibles bien distinctes, l'approche binarisée qui peut répondre à mes questions de départ s'avère pertinente. Poursuivant mes investigations théoriques, j'affine mon cadre de recherche en déterminant ce que sous-entend être un bon locuteur d'une langue. En abordant les notions de compétence vs performance, en passant en revue les points de vue de didacticiens des langues (Canale et Swain, De Pietro, Cuq, Beacco, Springer, Castellotti,.), d'interactionnistes (Hymes, Vasseur), de psycholinguistes (Lentin, Florin, Gombert.), de pédagogues (Boisseau), de chercheurs spécialisés dans l'évaluation du langage (Rondal, Comblain, Piérart, Muller.), mais aussi en prenant en considération les directives en matière de maîtrise du langage (Ministère de l'Education Nationale) et les préconisations concernant l'appropriation des langues étrangères (Conseil de l'Europe), je décide de centrer mon référentiel sur l'évaluation des compétences morphosyntaxiques, et de privilégier aussi bien le recueil d'échantillons de langage provoqué que de langage spontané.Ma phase exploratoire comprend également des investigations de terrain. Je commence par décrire les lieux d'enquête (situés en grande partie auprès d'élèves bénédictins de grande section de maternelle mais également au Tampon et à Pau), l'échantillonnage (choix des écoles, des classes, des enfants) et les moyens dont j'ai usés (démarche ethnologique, interactions filmées, activités réalisées, protocoles suivis). En sus de me fournir une meilleure connaissance des caractéristiques de ces jeunes témoins, grâce notamment à une observation participante, et de tester la pertinence de différents supports, tâches, approches d'évaluation et de systèmes de transcription de la parole interlectale, je montre que ce travail de terrain me permet de faire plusieurs constats qui corroborent l'hypothèse que j'avais formulée lors de mes investigations théoriques. En croisant divers facteurs saillants que j'ai pu relever, tels que les pratiques langagières (que j'étiquette sans hiérarchie « bi-linguisme », « mix-linguisme », « dominance en créole » et « dominance en français »), les représentations linguistiques, les attitudes face à la norme scolaire et la capacité à discriminer les deux codes linguistiques, aussi bien par les témoins que par moi-même dans le rôle d'évaluateur, j'ai pu en effet mesurer, parallèlement à des résultats prometteurs, la complexité et les limites d'une évaluation binarisée en termes de recueil et d'analyse de données, notamment lorsque l'évaluateur est face à certains profils langagiers d'enfants dans ce contexte de contact de langues proches. En effet, si une appréhension binaire, volontairement et « classiquement » lissée pour des besoins didactiques semble convenir pour évaluer, comparer la qualité des compétences d'enfants en créole et en français, le contexte local de contact de langues proches, empreint de représentations diglossiques et loin de se restreindre à des pratiques binaires bien délimitées et délimitables, m'amène à penser qu'un référentiel de ce type est susceptible d'avoir une portée limitée. C'est une hypothèse qu'il m'appartiendra alors de vérifier dans la suite de mon travail.PARTIE 3 : éclairée d'une meilleure connaissance du potentiel, des bornes et des astreintes concrètes d'une approche binarisée, l'étape suivante de ma référentialisation s'engage sur le choix des critères et des indicateurs qui permettront d'évaluer de jeunes enfants non lecteurs, à l'oral, en français et en créole. Ceci fait l'objet de la troisième partie de mon tapuscrit.Avant d'entrer dans le vif du sujet, je commence par un préambule indispensable, il me semble, sur les rapports de force en jeu dans l'activité normative (entre prescription et description, priorités, relativité et arbitraire, légitimité(s).). Sur ce sujet sensible, soumis à de fortes polémiques, aussi bien dans la communauté scientifique de manière générale que parmi les locuteurs évoluant dans la communauté réunionnaise, je présente dans une posture double de sociolinguiste et de didacticienne, mon propre positionnement par rapport à la notion de « norme(s) ». Pour que ma démarche soit mieux comprise et parce que je juge essentielle cette prise de recul face à un concept marginalisant souvent celui/celle qui y a recours (en dehors des praticiens), je pose explicitement le caractère relatif, construit et pourtant nécessaire, dans mon cas, de la norme pour ce référentiel. J'explique par ailleurs également ma légitimité de conceptrice de références normatives d'un point de vue variationniste, dans le cadre théorique choisi pour ce travail d'évaluation. Pour construire les références normatives de mon outil, le protocole méthodologique que je décide d'emprunter est le suivant :1.partir de descriptions déjà consignées des usages,-en créole (n'existent alors que des articles scientifiques, des grammaires, des dictionnaires qui ne décrivent que les normes d'usage d'adultes (Staudacher, Watbled, Chaudenson, Ramassamy, Cellier.)),-et en français (comprenant les travaux sur le français standard (Riegel et al., Arrivé et al., Wagner et Pinchon.), le français parlé (Gadet, Blanche-Benvéniste, Sauvageot.), le français régional (Carayol, Ledegen, Béniamino et Baggioni), le français parlé par les enfants (Florin, Boisseau, Comblain.)), 2.synthétiser et confronter ces travaux, non seulement entre eux mais également à mes propres recherches et compétences de locutrice native sur les items morphosyntaxiques en question, 3.afin de pouvoir procéder ensuite à un choix de critères, dont la pertinence sera à chaque fois justifiée, pour le langage provoqué et le langage spontané, 4. proposer des normes de références (indicateurs) permettant d'évaluer ces critères. Pour le créole, s'agissant à ce stade de normes provisoires,5.ajuster, actualiser ces dernières pour un public de jeunes enfants, en analysant le discours spontané en créole d'enfants réunionnais de maternelle (les « informateurs de référence»), dominants en créole ou bi-lingues.Un peu plus de trois centaines de pages de mon tapuscrit rendent compte de l'élaboration et du choix de ces critères et de ces indicateurs. Elles laissent rapidement voir un déséquilibre manifeste tant qualitatif que quantitatif entre l'état des connaissances en créole et en français. Dans un travail de grammairienne, descriptive mais également prescriptive, qui doit trier et compléter, pour le créole, des descriptions existantes certes intéressantes mais souvent contradictoires, délestées des variétés émergentes et complètement lacunaires en ce qui concerne les formes enfantines, j'aborde l'actualisation du thème verbal (système flexionnel, système analytique, indice i, règles de troncation), les pronoms personnels, la valence des thèmes verbaux, la modalité interrogative et la modalité négative. PARTIE 4 : la quatrième et dernière partie de ma référentialisation est d'abord consacrée à prendre la mesure des paramètres généraux de la conception de tâches d'évaluation et du recueil de données pour et auprès d'enfants. Suite à une revue de la littérature sur le sujet (notamment les travaux de Rondal, Moreau et Richelle, Khomsi, Florin, Brédart, Gombert, Marquillo.), je mets alors en avant deux considérations relatives aux critères de pertinence et de validité dans une évaluation, lors du recueil de données. Elles concernent les types d'activités généralement proposées dans les évaluations langagières (compréhension, production, détection et correction d'énoncés), et les tâches permettant de recueillir des comportements observables (avec un centrage sur leurs portées, biais, supports et consignes). Je clôture cette revue en apportant mes propres remarques, critiques et impressions sur l'expérience d'élaboration d'outils de recueil de données que j'ai pu développer sur le terrain réunionnais.Dans un deuxième temps, je présente et commente les épreuves pilotes que j'ai pré-testées auprès d'une centaine d'enfants de grande section, lors de séances d'évaluation individuelles, filmées et analysées.Cette banque d'épreuves est composée de 39 fiches classées selon qu'il s'agit d'évaluer des compétences en créole, des compétences en français ou des compétences « bilingues » (traduction, discrimination codique). Ces fiches présentent les tâches d'évaluation que j'ai élaborées et dont j'ai pré-testé la faisabilité, la pertinence et la sensibilité. Elles détaillent, pour chaque item syntaxique évalué, les critères pris en considération, le type d'activité choisi, les performances attendues, les supports de l'épreuve, les indications sur son organisation, les consignes, mais également les énoncés-amorces éventuellement prévus pour l'évaluateur, une analyse d'exemples de réponses "correctes" et "incorrectes" recueillis auprès des témoins pré-testés, et enfin des commentaires généraux sur l'épreuve en question (difficultés, variantes, précautions.). CONCLUSION : mon tapuscrit se clôt par une conclusion générale. Celle-ci synthétise tout d'abord les différentes étapes de ma référentialisation ainsi que leurs résultats, et revient sur les améliorations qui pourraient y être apportées. Elle présente dans un deuxième temps les apports de ce travail de recherche, qui soulève aussi des questionnements et permet de faire des propositions.Les apports comprennent notamment : -Une recherche théorique mais également de terrain auprès d'une centaine d'enfants réunionnais qui permet la mise à disposition d'un outil d'évaluation opératoire, adapté aux caractéristiques de petits écoliers réunionnais de grande section de maternelle et proposant des tâches détaillées, éprouvées et des repères normatifs concrets. Ces fiches sont utilisables en l'état, au final autant par des chercheurs en didactique des langues que par des praticiens, amenés à évaluer des compétences grammaticales orales de jeunes enfants à La Réunion.-De manière générale, un éclairage méthodologique concernant le recueil et l'analyse de données orales auprès de jeunes écoliers non lecteurs dans un contexte diglossique, et dans une situation de contact de langues proches.-Un enrichissement des travaux de description synchronique de la morphosyntaxe du français, mais surtout du créole de La Réunion, notamment :»par la prise en compte des variations intrasystémiques et intersystémiques (les formes émergentes actuelles dues à la dynamique interne du créole et au contact avec le français, les formes enfantines, le langage des jeunes), »par l'approche synthétique adoptée (analyse comparée de travaux, élaboration de tableaux récapitulatifs).Mais ce travail de référentialisation soulève également des questionnements pour la recherche, sur plusieurs points :Sur le plan didactique : -Cette étude montrant l'indispensable prise en compte des représentations linguistiques, des pratiques langagières, des compétences pragmatiques des élèves lors du processus de recueil de données orales, quelle validité, quelle pertinence peuvent avoir des évaluations lissées, hermétiques à la situation de contact de langues proches et aux spécificités des enfants réunionnais, comme les évaluations académiques en français, duplications d'évaluations métropolitaines a-contextualisées, conçues pour un public monolingue déjà francophone ?-Quelle pertinence ont les propositions d'exploitation didactique et explicite, « en l'état », du créole « L1 » comme tremplin pour atteindre le français L2, alors que les pré-tests menés lors de ma recherche laissent déjà entrevoir certes une majorité de témoins présentant des compétences grammaticales de base en français lacunaires, mais également des écoliers (même dominants créolophones), rencontrant des difficultés d'expression, voire de compréhension, en créole ?-La plupart des descriptions grammaticales actuellement disponibles ne prenant guère en compte les variations intra- et intersystémiques du créole, n'y aurait-il pas des répercussions sur la portée des propositions didactiques pour l'enseignement du français en partenariat avec le créole ? Sur le plan des recherches sur l'évaluation linguistique : -La perspective binaire choisie dans ce travail, jugée pertinente pour comparer des compétences linguistiques en créole et en français, présente des limites et ne peut notamment prendre en considération, en l'état, tous les profils langagiers d'enfants (par exemple, les mix-lingues non-discriminants). Au-delà d'une évaluation créole/français, quelle alternative avons-nous pour apprécier les compétences linguistiques, notamment morpho-syntaxiques, de ces enfants dont la parole tellement (a)maillée et sans « langue » cible ne peut être analysée dans ce cadre ? Faut-il mesurer ces compétences « bilingues » pour elles-mêmes, sans référence au créole et au français, comme tentent de le faire de manière relativement marginale certains chercheurs dans d'autres contextes linguistiques (ex : Stubbe et Peña pour des bilingues américano-hispanophones aux Etats-Unis) ? Mais ce qui semble possible pour des langues « non collatérales » l'est-il pour des langues génétiquement et structurellement proches ? En effet, une évaluation bilingue prenant comme référence normative la morphosyntaxe de l'ensemble du macrosystème réunionnais, donc une langue « fluide », où l'évaluateur ne dispose pas de normes de référence explicitées/explicitables a priori et donc justifiées/justifiables, est-elle envisageable ? Bien qu'elle laisse voir sa pertinence sur le plan pédagogique, et réponde au critère de recherche de sens, comment justifierait-elle son objectivisation lorsque l'évaluateur ne fait que « « (re)sentir » que ça se dit » et donc détient en lui-même des règles « mouvantes », insaisissables de locuteur natif de l'interlecte ? Comment gérer cette incontournable implication dérogeant aux bases de toute évaluation, lorsque les références normatives sont intériorisées et a priori non externalisables ?Ce travail de recherche permet enfin d'émettre des préconisations et propositions pour des pistes de travail concernant la didactique du français en partenariat avec le créole : -S'attacher à identifier les conditions de conscientisation des codes par des enfants actuellement discriminants (sans guidage scolaire), pour l'étude de pistes permettant aux écoliers, dès la petite section, de discriminer des traits prototypiques du créole et du français.-Prendre davantage en considération l'hétérogénéité des profils langagiers des enfants réunionnais qui ne sont pas à considérer comme une masse linguistiquement homogène (même dans les écoles de quartiers dits défavorisés) et continuer la réflexion sur la prise en compte du macrosystème langagier réunionnais.-Compléter les recherches sur le créole parlé actuellement par la population réunionnaise (enfants, jeunes, adultes) et ouvrir ces descriptions à toutes les variations.-Briser le caractère ésotérique des ouvrages de descriptions grammaticales actuels et encourager la publication d'ouvrages de vulgarisation, non puristes, « accessibles » au public des étudiants (futurs enseignants) en formation mais également à celui des enseignants déjà en poste.-Prendre davantage en compte et faire évoluer les représentations négatives de la population locale (notamment les parents d'élèves), concernant le partenariat (direct ou indirect) avec le créole. Ce sujet faisant l'objet de fortes tensions sur le terrain scolaire, étudier des possibilités d'approches alternatives (exploitation du médium télévisuel, création/exploitation de structures éducatives parallèles comme des associations de type « ti lékol maron » ou des centres de loisirs), privilégiant la maîtrise du langage avec un aspect ludique, dans un contexte « apaisé ».

Abstrak Seksisme merupakan suatu hal yang memegang peranan penting dalam film ini. Diskriminasi sangat erat kaitannya dengan kemunculan seksisme. Disini para tokoh yang didasari sifat, bahasa dan latar belakang masing-masing yang memerankan peranan penting dalam munculnya seksisme bahasa di alur cerita dalam studi ini. Dalam film yang di produseri oleh Saul Dibb ini, terdapat empat tokoh yang saling berkaitan dengan masalah internal pernikahan antara Duke dan Duchess dari Devonshire yang membuat keberadaan wanita diremehkan dan dipandang sebelah mata. Teori dari Sara Mills digunakan karena berkaitan dengan bahasa seksis baik secara langsung maupun tidak langsung seperti dalam pemilihan kata atau perumpamaan. Terdapat enam tipe bahasa seksis yaitu: kata generik, derivatif, istilah non-paralel yang menunjukkan semantik degenerasi, seksisme dalam pepatah, seksisme dalam kata-kata makian. Melalui hasil tersebut, studi ini mampu menunjukkan efek atau akibat dari keberadaan bahasa seksis dalam film yang berlatar belakang seksisme ini. Kata Kunci: gender, seksisme, bahasa seksis. Abstract Sexism plays an important role in this film. Discrimination is closely associated with the appearance of sexism. The figures here are based on the character personality, language and background of characters which plays an important role in the emergence of sexism in the language of the storyline in this study. The film which was produced by Saul Dibb, there are four interrelated characters with internal marital problem between the Duke and Duchess of Devonshire who makes women presence underrated and underestimated. Sara Mills theory is used because it is associated with sexist language either directly or indirectly as in the choice of words or metaphorical. There are six types of sexist language, namely: the generic, derivative, non-parallel terms that indicate semantic degeneration, sexism in proverb, sexism in swear words. Through these results, this study was able to demonstrate the effect or result of the presence of sexist language in the film which has a sexism background. Keywords: gender, sexism, sexist language. Introduction Socially, women almost differ in terms of social role in the society; they are considered as a person who does not need a high position and education as men had, women are only needed to maintain the housework and caring the children or having a domestic business in order can also keep their babies in the same time. Women always underestimated as the second or lower creature whereas man as the higher than women from any things. This fact will factually create discrimination and gap between men and women. Women is lack of reproductive, sexual harrasment, and men's violence againts women. In brief, the discourse of women discrimination definitely cannot be separated from the discourse of patriarchal culture. It shows in a lot of part in our country that women mistreatment is still and always exist. Attitudes and behaviour based on traditional assumptions about women, the stereotypes of women, sexual roles in society have been become phenomenon and belief in our life. It comes from every people minds to think and behave through that traditional assumptions. We know that as people no matter the sex wants to treat as well and equal in any aspect of life. Women inhabited a separate, private sphere, one suitable for the so called inherent qualities of femininity: emotion, passivity, submission, dependence, and selflessness, all derived, it was claimed insistently, form women's sexual and reproductive organization" (Kent, 1990: 30). Allowing the principle that has been made by men assumption and belief, women consciously made by men like dependence, passive, low and tractable. As Susan Kent observes: "Women were so exclusively identified by their sexual functions that nineteenth-century society came to regard them as 'the Sex'" (Kent, 1990:32). This research studies about some social phenomenon that are found in our society through the visual media such as movie. The aim of this research is to describe the sexist language that used by the characters in The Duchess movie. This research gives understanding of sexist language and the way how it is used in movie dialogue. The kinds of types of sexist language that found in The Duchess movie based on overt sexism and indirect sexism or contextually meaning and the diction based on Sara Mills theory. SEXIST LANGUAGE Researchers are mainly concerned about female and male differences in language use and the reasons behind the phenomenon. They stick to the view that language itself is not sexist, but the society is. The social sexism is transferred to language by human being, and at the same time, sexist and insulting words may reinforce biased view, and changes in the society may be reflected. So language is not only a guide, it is even a mirror that reflects the sexism in social reality, and at the same time, it makes people see the social reality more clearly. Sexist language is language that expresses bias in favor of one sex and thus treats the other sex in a discriminatory manner. In most cases, the bias is in favor of men and against women. All kinds of unequal phenomena in society including gender bias are bound to be reflected on its lexis. Gu Jiazu (2002) thinks English as a sexist language is marked with distinctive sexist factors, among which the lexis is the most important aspect. There also have been many critical feminist surveys of English lexis (Nilsen et al., 1977; Schulz, 1990) which have argued that sexism is inherent in many of the labels which English speakers use. Some feminists have pursued the idea that there exist lexical gaps in the language-aspects of women's lives which are commonplace, but have no words to describe them (Spender, 1985). So it is frequently argued that these usages are sexist. Mills suggests that there are two forms of sexism which are overt and indirect sexism. Overt sexism is clear and unambiguous, while indirect sexism can only be understood contextually in relation to the interpretation of surrounding utterances. Indirect sexism is extremely common and therefore need ways to challenge and analyze its usage in language. (Mills, 2008). OVERT SEXISM According the Sara Mills's theory, there are two types of sexism which are overt sexism and indirect sexism. Overt sexism is one of the parts of sexism which can be clearly be understood with some forms that can be generalized about linguistically and contextually. Overt or direct sexism is the type of usage which can be straightforwardly identified through the use of linguistics markers, or through the analysis of presupposition, which has historically been associated with the expression of discriminatory opinions about women, which signals to hearers that women are seen as an inferior group in relation to males. (Mills, 2008:11). There are some forms of overt sexism such as: Generic nouns, derivational, non-parallel term, sexism in proverb and sexism in swear words. In the other hand, there is also indirect sexism. It necessary to consider more details the proposition. It will be rather difficult to analyze because the reader can be understood because the reader must be really understand with the transparent source of data as like in the script. It shows indirectly in metaphor and irony that usually exaggerate in stereotyping one sex. In society, men are considered the norm of the human species. They are viewed as those representing all the human beings, male and female. Simply, it can be said that "male = "human" norm. This practice makes women invisible in language. In addition, it marginalizes women and reflects a male dominated society. In accordance to that, Sara Mills and some supporting linguists gives a guideline how to identify the linguistic structure differences used in English, we can analyze morphologically by these following ways: a. Generic nouns Another well-known example of generic masculine term is "man". Man and woman as two equal components of human race are actually not equal in English lexicon. Man, besides its reference to male human being can also refer to the whole race. The usage in a general sense of man makes woman invisible. For example; (1) All men must die. (2) Man is a social animal. It is easy to see that "man", and "men" can be used generically to refer to both male and female. In the first sentence the word Men refers to human being. Despite this, in the second sentence also state the word Man in which it is a human species or animal. Thus, man makes males linguistically visible and females linguistically invisible. From this, one can know that in English using "man" or "men" indicates "the human race", they treat man as the center of the society, an embodiment of criterion and totally ignore the existence of woman. b. Generic Pronouns (he, his, him) In English there are a group of nouns of common gender, which refer to either male or female such as student, person, teacher, etc. When such nouns are used with generic reference in single form, the traditional grammar advocates to use the masculine pronouns in the context for the purpose of coherence with generic nouns.( Zhang Zhenbang,1995). Generic pronouns are pronouns that are said to refer, with equal likelihood, to woman and men. But the English language ignores women by allowing masculine terms to be used specifically to refer to males and commonly to refer to human beings in general. According to the rule of traditional grammar when the indefinite pronoun one is used for generic reference, then in the context usually one, one's, or himself is used to be its relevance. But in order to avoid repetition, he, his, him, or himself is chosen, especially in American English (Zhang Zhenbang,1995) See the examples: (1) If one wants to see the ruins, he must find his own guide. (2) Everyone must do his work well. In the first and second sentences, one and Everyone refers to the concept of people, which is a concept of common gender, we do not know they are men or women but it uses masculine pronoun. He and his in the context formally manifests the imagery of men but semantically represents people of either gender. The operation of the grammatical rule conventionally elevates the status of the masculine pronouns and lowers the feminine ones. c. Derivational "In English, derivational morphemes are mainly prefixes and suffixes. These affixes often change the part of the stem. The affixes thereby help us to identify relationships within words". Derivation is a way of word formation. It forms a word with meaning and category distinct from that of its base through the addition of an affix. The original base is the core of the formed word and carries the main complements of its meaning. The affixes are always bound morphemes, which carries information about meaning or function. In English lexicon, one of the most obvious evidences of the sexism is the affixes which lead to a view of women as a derivation from a male term. The feminine one is always derivative of the masculine one by adding a feminine suffix such as -ess and –ette. Actor, for instance, with the meaning of "a person who plays the part of a character in a movie or play", when attached to a feminine suffix –ess, becomes actress with the meaning of "woman with profession similar to those of "actor" and as for –ette, when usher is adhered to –ette, it becomes usherette. Such pairs of the words are of long lists in English lexicon. Here just list some of sexist based on its derivational: Ambassador - ambassadress Prince - princess Poet - poetess Author – authoress Waiter – Waitress Manager – Manageress That some of lists of sexist derivational word have different meaning based on the classification usage for men or women. The examples show and prove that the suffixes -ette and –ess are for woman only. It is considered sexist because when men do not need any affixes to refer to them, women need it. Furthermore, the terms in the right side are the feminine terms which are only indicated to the women only. Those feminine accents in the words ambassadress, duchess, princess and poetess and so on are not referred to the men or even to all human being, but those are especially marked to the women. d. The Non-Parallel Term The non parallel term between men and women are also the real example how sexist the English is. In accordance to that, Lakoff pointed out that words that were once equivalent terms for males and females have often diverged in meaning over time. (Chaika, Elaine.1982:205). Non parallel term or semantic derogation between men and women are also the real example how sexist the English is. In accordance to that, Lakoff pointed out that words that were once equivalent terms for males and females have often diverged in meaning over time. Consider these following examples: Mrs, Ms – Mr Mister – Mistress Governor – Governess Lady –Lord Lady – gentleman From the description above, none of feminine terms in the list connotes the same degrees as the masculine terms and almost all of them acquired as secondary sexual connotation. Lexicographers have noted that, once a word or term becomes associated with women, it often acquires semantics characteristics that are congruent with social stereotypes and evaluations of women as a group, a process that has variously been termed 'semantic derogation' (Shulz, 1975), 'semantic degeneration' (Miller and Swift, 1976) and 'semantic polarization' (Eakins and Eakins, 1978). e. SEXISM IN PROVERBS Proverbs are a short pithy saying in common and recognized use; a concise sentence, often metaphorical or alliterative in form which is held to express some truth as-curtained by experience or observation. The fact that there are many English proverbs which contain the words discriminating, distinguishing women, making women are worry about it. Since proverbs are standard, it is hard to change and create new proverbs substituting the old ones. Consider these following examples of English proverbs: 1."A man is as old as he feels, and a woman as old as she looks" this example implicitly creates an image that this sexist saying suggest that men age better than women. 2. "A man's home is his castle". This example also discriminate the women. It implicitly create an image that the peaceful and lovely house is only man has. 3."A good man is hard to find" the proverbs means that the difficulties for woman to fin a good man that is suitable for them. Or in finding male patner. f. SEXISM IN SWEAR WORDS The swear words is an expression in sometimes conscious or unconsciously said by speaker who is in a bad condition. In some area swear words is a kind of taboo to say, but in the others are very common and probably become a habit. Those swear words are used to insult, to curse, to offend, or to mock at something or someone when the speaker strong emotion which the impact can trivialize women position. Swearing is the way someone uses obscene words orally to insult, to curse or even to offend something (someone or action). Also, for emphasizing when the persons have strong emotion (Hughes, 1991). Usually, when someone has been insulted, someone will feel offended and easy to be angry. According to Crystal (1997) as cited in (Adeoye: 2005), sexist swear words is regarded as an emotive or expressive function of language. Hughes (1991: 224-225) claims that people tend to swear when he/ she angry or disappointed. They are also likely to swear when they would like to express antagonism, frustration, surprise, anger, and shock. Usually some words that belong to this category are fuck, cunt, shit. Swear words are very common in people's ears, because it sometimes said in the public society or even in the movie. There are several reasons why does swearing occur: 1. To express feeling in words rather than in actions, especially if you do not have bigger vocabulary (Crystal, 1995: 156). 2. To express their anger and frustration. 3. To seem brave. 4. To make people afraid when they have been violence by someone in the form of sex or other violence. 5. To imitate what other people do. There are very little swear words have been written for language learners, yet nearly all- native speakers use it in daily communication. The term such as: "fuck", "damn","bastard", "son of a bitch, "motherfucker", "asshole", and "bitch". That can be used as the examples of sexist swear words which provoke the violent confrontation. In other words, according to Eisenson and Boase (in Liedlich, 1973: 107), there is some words that is not supposed to be say in the public society, because it brings the negative meaning for the speaker also the listeners. It also makes a bad habit that the speaker feels very common. If there is someone uses obscene words to swear other people will judge them as people who are impolite, do not have high and well education or having less vocabulary. Those examples above are definitely can refer to both sexes man and women. Unfortunately, in practice those words are mostly indicated to the women behaviors and attitudes. It is the fact that English has linguistic and semantic discrimination through the practice of language usage; it is briefly can be seen in the word motherfucker and bitch. INDIRECT SEXISM According to Sara Mills, she said that indirect sexism is ironising sexism. Since it both challenging overt sexism and keeps it in play. Benwell (2006) terms this type of indirect sexism 'new sexism'. She also adds that it's very reminiscent of, it is not identical to past forms of sexism which clearly shown. It differentiates of they way overt sexism and indirect sexism is used. This type of new sexism is bring the outdated notions of sexism become new term one. That is why Williamson also called this new type of sexism as 'retro-sexism'. The fact that the humor and irony are used when being sexist does not change the nature of sexism itself, but it just only interpreting simply and different way of respond the new sexism. This term of sexism used to categorize a set of stereotypical beliefs about women which cannot be directly related to a certain linguistic usage or features. (Mills, 2008:10). Overt sexism is now largely seen as anachronistic and so it has been driven underground; indirect sexism is one which in some ways attempts to deny responsibility for an utterance, mediating the utterance through irony or disguising the force of the sexism of the utterance through humor, innuendo, embedding sexism at the level of presupposition, or prefacing sexist statements with disclaimers or hesitation (Mills, 1998:135). Indirect sexism can be found in several aspects such as humor and irony, scripts and metaphor. For example in jokes, it is a complex way constituting women as 'minority group' without taking responsibility for that exclusion. Sexist jokes allow generally unacceptable views of women to be expressed, because the person usually tells the jokes generally can claim that they themselves did not make up the joke. (Mills, 2008:71). Metaphor The narrative pathway or script is brought to play in new reports about women and men in a public sphere. This indirect sexism refers to women implicitly. It uses things to refers to the object either men or women. Irony Irony is a common strategy for humorous remarks about women. The term of ironic sexism is often satire the object in polite way. Irony involves a difference or contrast between appearance and reality - that is a discrepancy between what appears to be true and what really is true. RESEARCH METHOD According to Bogdan and Taylor in Moleong (2007:4), descriptive qualitative research is a research procedure that represents data either written or spoken from the people and behaviors which can be observed. In addition, Krik and Miller in Moloeng (2007:4) defines the descriptive qualitative ad a certain tradition in social sciences fundamentally relies on human observation in its own religion and deals with these people in language and terminologies. Qualitative research is mostly associated with words, language and experiences rather than measurements, statistics and numeral figures. Furthermore, in analyzing the types of sexism which are used by the characters of The Duchess Movie, it will be conducted by using the descriptive qualitative research. Qualitative approach is taken because the decided research efforts in discussing, analyzing and finding the social phenomena which is running naturally; it is not a controlled or based on laboratory research. The collected data are the subjects of experiences and perspectives; the researcher attempts to arrive at a rich description of the people, objects, events or conversations and so on. The data are from the words, phrases, clauses, or sentences that found in the dialogues of some characters. The researcher uses this method because she wants to get a brief description and a rich understanding about the expressions of sexist language and the classification which categorized as sexist gender biased based on linguistics terms in The Duchess movie. The source of the data which is used by the researcher is taken from the conversation or dialogues which is in the script and the movie of The Duchess. The characters who will be analyzed are Georgiana as a Duchess, The Duke Devonshire, Lady Elizabeth (Bess), and Charles Grey. In addition, to avoid the research becomes wide and broad, the researcher used a theory to identify and to classify, identify and analyze the types of sexist language. There are some theory which is gathered some sexist theory to support and complete the main theory. This study used the theory of Sara Mills in "Language and Sexism" and Philip M. Smith "Language, The Sexes and Society". It also helpes and completes by some supporting theory from other linguists in describing the types of sexist language in journals. The reason of the researcher gathers and combines the theory because to make the analysis become details and complete. It also adds some information of sexist language types. Most of the data will be found in the types of overt and indirect sexism, because the researcher concern in the words, phrases, utterances or sentences in many setting in this movie. The researcher chooses those characters because the other characters do not influence much about the gender discrimination which appears in the story. The theme of this movie is about internal gender discrimination in The Duke and The Duchess marriage, so it is not possible for other characters to interfere. In the technique of the data analysis, the researcher begins to analyze the data toward the procedures. In conducting the research procedure, the researcher follows three steps. The first, the researcher classifies the data which are words, utterances or sentences in based on its types of sexism orderly. The second, the researcher describes those data based on the two classifications of sexism which are overt and indirect sexism. The data is in the form of words, proverbs and utterances. The third, the researcher describes the existence of the sexist language which exists in The Duchess movie. DISCUSSION The analysis of sexist language or expression in discriminating sexes inappropriately above is used to drawing attention to the way language used to represent women in that movie. According to the data analysis and finding of the types of sexist language linguistically above, the researcher found six types of sexist language in The Duchess movie. They are consist of sexism in word such as the use of generic noun, derivational, non-parallel term which shows semantics degeneration, sexism in proverbs, sexism in swear words, and indirect sexism such as metaphor and irony. Some characters such as The Duke (William Cavendish), Duchess (Georgiana Spencer), The Duke's mistress (Lady Elizabeth Foster) and Georgiana's secret affair (Charles Grey) are used some term in sexist language by Sara Mills in the movie. The generic noun is term which is used to refer both men and women, but in effect it often refers to men only. Generic noun perform very useful function of allowing us to refer to an entire class of entities with a single word, and most if not all languages have one or more forms that can be used to designate members of the human species in general. This term applied when the speaker Georgiana unconsciously says in her speech when The Duke and her held in Bath Assembly room at night. She said that, "only two specimens of this rare bird are known to man." The word man here is used to gather both men and women knowledge about the two rare bird. She uses that word because of the reason for the recent attention surrounding this term is the growth of awareness about the portrait of the social order implied in which the male are half of the species whose members dominate. The word "man" used by Georgiana is because to respect the dominating of male in the society. People often refer to themselves and using nouns that describe an occupation or performance of an activity, such as "Duchess" in the datum (2), "Let them talk! Grey makes me a fallen woman, well and good, now William may divorce me and Bess becomes Duchess of Devonshire!". It seems clear that the great majority of such terms more readily evoke the image of man than of a woman. Some feminists have argued that the addition of diminutive suffix to agent nouns results in the term that have less semantic potency than unaltered counterpart, and that this both causes and reflects a devaluation of those who occupy this agent roles (Smith, 1953:46). Derivational suffix which found in this movie takes when Georgiana or the speaker says emotionally that Bess can become a Duchess of Devonshire in The Duke allows and gives his arrangement to have a relationship with Charles Grey. Based on the definition of the word "Duchess", it means as a noblewoman or a woman holding a rank equivalent to duke in her own right. Duchess (female) can either be a monarch ruling over a duchy or a member of the nobility, historically of highest rank below the monarch. The word "duchess" is added by feminine suffix –ess to identify that the agent noun uses female reference. Based on the representation of Duke and "Duchess", they are different. Duke tends to manage the social economy, politic, and something which is valuable. In inversely different with the job description of "duchess" who is only manage about the simple thing. In addition, the position of "duchess" in this movie shows that also, she has no special except in little space in Whig, and for the rest she only cares about what she should care as a mother. Based on the job description of "duchess", it shows that the position of The Duke always becomes superior. So, when there are agents nouns placed in one sentences, it seems that the old maxim "Duke and Duchess" is more honored in the breach than the observance. In fact, little is known about the psychological significance of the word order pairs like this, and the fact that women often come second or may not signify to the listener that they have less status or importance than the male. In addition, the term of non-parallel implied because of some reason deals with women social status at that time. "Mr", "Mistress", "Lady/ladies - Gentlemen", "Governor", and "Lover" are the sexist language which found in the movie. From those words, we can see that there is no similar meaning from its pairs. Meanwhile, those words have implicit meaning which degenerates women become lower status from the pairs. It can be conclude that most women as the speaker of the words above are aware about the condition of women whom trivialized by men physically and mentally. From the word "mistress", "lady" and "lover", all of them have similar meaning as women who are become a man maid of desire or tend to be having lower status. While the word "Mr", "governor" and "gentlemen" are also treated as sexist because it has higher social status than its pairs. None of feminine terms in the list of data above connotes the same degree of strength or power as its masculine counterpart, and almost all of them have acquired as secondary sexual connotation. The character of The Duke in the datum (8), "That's one way of putting it. Your mother called it 'common decency before personal gratification', or some such thing… the exact words escape me…" shows about the sexism in proverb about the matter of social interest. He tries to give an example from Georgiana's mother quotation which grabs by him. According to the definition of proverb, it means short pithy saying in frequent and widespread use that expresses a basic truth or practical precept. In general use, that proverb states about a general truth or piece of advice to the hearer, Georgiana. That proverb has an implicit meaning that the position of the Duke is always strong in the matter of conducting his wife. In the other words, Georgiana has to follow what her husband as to do. In this circumstance, the position of Georgiana is awry. She has to choose between her children or her desire and affection of Charles Grey which she doesn't get from her husband. As the main Character, The Duke always becomes the centre of the society. He should speak politely. In the other hand, in some cases he cannot put himself in that situation. Based on The Duke character personality, he kinds of man who is introvert, cannot control his emotion and has a switch temper that can be changed in certain time. So, he often expresses his anger or dissatisfaction through something near him. He also often use sexist swear word to release it such as "damn", "hell", and "bastard". Those words are deal with death term which uses to mock or curse people. That term also to express The Duke feeling rather than in action, especially he does not have bigger vocabulary. In the datum (15), "Give me a son and then do what the hell you want, as long as you do it discreetly. Until then you stay here and do as I say." The Duke says "hell" to express his frustration of his failure to obtain a male heir from Georgiana. Furthermore, this sexist swears word helps by his action in intimidates his wife by hurting her in action. The other main characters, Georgiana often use parable or imagery to reflect her own circumstances. The imagery and parable itself categorized as indirect sexism term. The data which treated as indirect in the movie are "male company, "imprisoned", "throw", "you both of another world that does not exist and never will" and "love is an act! It's more than words and undying oaths!" That indirect sexism consists of metaphor and irony. As the definition of indirect sexism, it cannot be understood by linguistics markers but using contextual meaning. Metaphor is a figure of speech in which a word or phrase is applied to an object or action to which it is not literally applicable. It can also regards as representative or symbolic of something else, esp. something abstract. In this case, the character of Georgiana often uses this term to symbolize herself which is bridled in her own internal marriage problem. The other character, Bess also express her sadness and disappointment of being left by her husband because of his "mistress" in datum (5). The fact that metaphor and irony are used when being sexist does not change the nature of sexism itself, but it rather simply changes the way it can be responded to. From those terms of sexist languages which found in The Duchess movie, it can be concluded that the sexist language related with those character because of the impact of the sexist theme occurs in that internal marriage problem. The impact of those sexist languages to the theme of the movie is when those utterances make the women participation underestimated more. The significance effects shows when inequality between men and women, social inequalities which women have and the position of men who do not want to be defeated by circumstances of women influence to the theme of the movie. The existence of sexist language is also because the aspects of character personality, language, background and its context. Character personality takes part in the analysis because the speakers unconsciously speak it refers to their character. For example like The Duke, he often uses kind of sexist swear word in order to replace his anger in to the word or someone close. It is because The Duke is introvert, close and has a switch temper which can be changed in certain time. It similar with Charles Grey, as a man, he also temperamental when he knows something inappropriate as like Georgiana fake promise and prefer to go back for her children rather than him. In the other hand, if Georgiana and Bess as representative from women sides they tend to be polite and use their feeling rather than logic in their problem. The choice of word which used by those characters mostly reflects their circumstances as women at that time. From those characters personality, we can see that words which that use reflect each people characters. That choice of words absolutely influences to their language when they speak such as in the term of sexist swear word which mostly expressed by The Duke. Furthermore, character personality and language cannot be separated with the context and background of each people and movie at that time. The speakers will consider the language which they will use based on the context of the talks. The background here used to support the situation of the character based on place and time in their situation or in this case is in Victorian era. The background may be a stereotype or culture of certain gender. The most data commonly found in non-parallel term, indirect sexism and sexism in swear words. It is because the women condition cannot be equated with men. People at that time still holding patriarchal culture which means the position of men is superior and holding every aspect. They often underestimate women self-esteem to become men mistress whom can be throwing away anytime. Women seem like do not have strength to be independent without men position in front of them. Men are allowed to have more than one mistress even they are a centre of society. On the other hand, when women try to express their feeling to other men it considers as improper behavior and taboo. All of utterances which have been said by the characters are reflecting their character personality. Based on the explanation of the existing of sexist language above, there are some reasons that make the women circumstances become weak in physically and mentally. This evolutionary reasoning provided justification for the emotional and mental differences between men and women. At last, sexism can be existing because of stereotype of women and it reflects to the culture. The character personality helps to make it clear where the mental and emotional aspects involve in indicating their existence through language. Those stereotypes create morals and social values that applied until this time. The only way of changing that social structure is to make the position of men and women equally same no matter what. CONCLUSION This chapter presents the conclusion and suggestion based on the analysis and finding in chapter four. The finding shows the sexism by the characters in the movie involves overt and indirect sexism. Overt sexism is a type of usage which can be identified directly through the linguistic markers. While indirect sexism can only be understood contextually in relation to the interpretation of surrounding utterances. However, this term of sexism used to categorize a set of stereotypical beliefs about women which cannot directly analyzed by linguistic features. The linguistics features of sexism are divided into several types, as follows: (1) Sexism in words. The using of man in "Well, only two specimens of this rare bird are known to man" considers as generic nouns which should be referred to both of sex. (2) Sexism in words of using English pairs or word order of words showing non parallel term or semantic degeneration between men and women such as the word Mr "In the play this evening, there was a scene in which Lady Teazle and Mr. Surface discuss their affair", Ladies, gentlemen, and mistress "My husband, Mr. Foster, is enjoying his mistress in Bournemouth, and I wanted some diversion.". This non parallel term shows that there are semantic derogations between men and women position. (3) Sexism in words using suffix –ess in "Let them talk! Grey makes me a fallen woman, well and good, now William may divorce me and Bess becomes Duchess of Devonshire!" as job occupations of profession such as Duchess. This type of sexism in words shown that the discrimination through gender divisions still exists in the matter of word order. (4) Sexism in Proverb. There is only one analysis which found as sexism in proverb as like "common decency before personal gratification". It related to the high power of men than women. This kind of English proverb seems like the metaphorical of men who held to express the position of men that is always unbalance and prioritized than women. (5) Indirect sexism. This new term is not related to the certain set of linguistic usage and features but contextually of a diction which replace and describe their speaker situation. Indirect sexism which found in this research is about metaphor and irony such as "How about 'imprisoned' in my own house'?" and "I'm ill at ease with male company for the moment.". (6) The last is sexism in swear words. There are various kinds of swear words which used by the character of the movie such as "hell" as like this utterance: "Give me a son and then do what the hell you want, as long as you do it discreetly.", "bastard" in this utterance:"Three boys??? Do you think I can make those bastards my heirs? Well, do you?" and the insulting term for women such as "whore", "Be quite you fool! (to Georgiana). Are you his whore?!". The usage of sexist swear words express their disagreement, anger or objectionable depends on the context and problem of the character. In addition, there is no general neutral term to replace the words. The last is In addition, some aspects of sexist language existing in the movie are character personality, language, background and its context. All of those aspects are interrelated and interconnected each other. Based on the finding, the character personality influences more because it reflects to their language they use. Their language will refer to their position as a centre role model that perceived by public. While the background and context reflects women stereotypical knowledge in Victorian era which bring the character of women discriminated by men. SUGGESTION Using a language without regard to the gender classification is expected to minimize the woman discrimination in the language. So, the researcher wants to contribute some suggestion for the next researcher. First, the next researcher can use and complete the analysis by new sexism which is indirect sexism. It used to analyze sexism without directly using linguistics markers but, it uses diction like in metaphorical, humors, irony or satire which trivializes women. Second, the researcher hopes that the next researcher analyzes the source of data by putting the historical background so that they can find out the characteristic of their style of writing. The historical background can use to prove why those sexist languages occurred. Lastly, the researcher hopes that the terms of English indirect sexism will be applied to avoid the use of sexism in written and spoken even it is not linguistically shown in the next research. DAFTAR PUSTAKA Aini, Nur, 2010. The Sexist Swear Words Used by the Characters in Shottas Movie, English Letters and Language Department, Faculty of Humanities and Culture, Maulana Malik Ibrahim State Islamic University of Malang. Brannon, Linda. (2002). Gender: Psychological Perspectives. Chapter 7: Gender Stereotypes: Masculinity and Femininity (pp. 152-76). London: Allyn and Bacon. Cameron, Deborah. (1985). Feminism and Linguistic Theory. London: Macmilan Press Chaika, Elaine. 1982. Language the Social Mirror. Massachusetts: Newbury House Publishers, Inc. He, Guimei. 2010. Journal of Language Teaching and Research of An Analysis of Sexism in English. Academy Publisher manufactured in Finland: Qingdao University of Science and Technology, Qingdao 266061, China. Vol. 1, No. 3, pp. 332-335, May 2010. Holmes, Janet. 1992. An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. Addison Westley Longman, Inc., New York. Johnson, Allan G. 2000. The Blackwell dictionary of sociology: A user's guide to sociological language. ISBN978-0-631-21681-0. Retrieved November 21, 2011. Kent, Susan. 1990. Sex and Suffrage in Britain 1860-1914. Princeton: Princeton University Press. Lei, Xiaolan. (2006). Sexism in Language. Northwest Polytechnic University, China. Vol. 5, No.1. Lewin, Miriam (Ed.), In the shadow of the past: Psychology portrays the sexes. New York: Columbia University Press. Lexy J. Moleong, 2007. Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif, Bandung: PT. Remaja Rosda Karya. Linda Sofia, 2008. The Sexist Language of Jokes Column in Hello Magazine. Thesis, English Letters and Language Department, Faculty of Humanities and Culture, The State Islamic University of Malang. Mills, Sara. 2008. Language and Sexism. Cambridge University Press, New York. Parks, J. B. & Roberton, M. A. (1998). Contemporary arguments against nonsexist language: Blaubergs (1980) revisited. Sex Roles, 39(5&6), 445-461. Smith, Philip M. 1953. Language, Sexes and Society. Basil Blackwell Inc, New York. Wardaugh, Ronald. 1986. An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Page Bros. INTERNET SOURCE http://www.encyclopedia.com/topic/Sexism.aspx (accessed in January 10th 2013) (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sexism). (accessed in January 10th 2013) http://digilander.libero.it/mgtund/sexism_in_language%202.htm (accessed in March 1st 2013) http://www.victorianweb.org/gender/sextheory.html (accessed in March 28th 2013) http://webpage.pace.edu/nreagin/tempmotherhood/fall2003/3/HisPage.html (accessed in March 28th 2013)

AbstractThis thesis describes about the domination of Western knowledge toward Chinese tradition by illustrating the superiority or prominence of Western knowledge in the novel East Wind: West Wind written by Pearl S. Buck. The analysis focuses on two goals, there are (1) to portray how are the Eastern and the Western represented in the novel, and (2) to analyze how the influence of western knowledge dominated Chinese tradition. To analyze this novel, the the writer applied post-colonial criticism the writer focused on Orientalism as an approach by Edward Said. In analyze aspech the way Western discourse dominates the main character, Kwei-lan, as represented of Chinese people by issuing the discourse of superiority. In addition, the writer applied content analysis method to analyze documents in order to give a deep understanding toward the novel by using close reading technique, which requires to read the whole of the novel for several times. From the analysis, the writer found that Western discourse did construct the domination over the Orient (Chinese culture) by representing the differences in term family relationships (simple vs complex), mind (open minded vs narow minded) and beliave (superstitious vs rational), the discourse succeed to dominate and create the truth or reality as the assumption about the West as supperior and the East as inferior.Key word: orientalismBackgroundThe term discourse is the range of social practices, customs, and institutions that cover any given subject matter. According to Michel Foucault, ―.discourse is strongly bounded area of social knowledge; a system of statements within the world can be known‖ (1967:70). Through language, discourse gives the role of us in our society. It constructs our knowledge and understanding about who we are and what the world we live are. Because of discourse covers every social matters, it can be used in any perspective.Therefore, the influence of Western discourse to the world made people tend to consider West is more superior than East. The Western discourse of domination is one of the effects of Industrial revolution that born the idea of imperialism that implement in the form of colonialism.In journal of universty of pretoria by Lazere S. Rukundwa and Andries G. Van Ardel The Formation of Postcolonial Theory2Research Associate (2007:421), through Orientalism, Said presented the discourse that have been constructed to society about the perception of Eurocentric or Western where naturally they represented as the rational, mature, progressive, honest, normal, masculine, good, upright, democratic, and superior instead of Eastern which represent irrational, abnormal, backward, passive, undisciplined, primitiveness, and inferior. The simplest example regarded to this is people are assumed as smart or intelligent whenever we use English to non-native. It widely influenced people, society, lifestyles, and human life. Such discourse was able to construct the human standard as seem as they are. This system, discourse, has taught people, certainly us, the world of what they want us to be.Thus, literary works is one of the ways western domination affect our mind. However, it is also a good implementation in understanding aspects of post-colonialism issues which concern the life; cultural, and interactions of cultural aspects. The interactions of difference cultures have much inspire author to make various literary works to explore those issues. Pearl S. Buck's novel East Wind: West Wind (1930) is one of popular works considered has postcolonial implication.The novel East Wind: West Wind tells about Kwei-Lan, a girl who was born as traditional noble Chinese family. She has no experience with modern western style before. As a Chinese royal woman, she has taught everything to become a good daughter of the family and to be good wife for her husband. Her husband is a noble Chinese royal man that had twelve years abroad, America, studying medicine. Kwei-lan has been betrothed to her husband since she was born. Her husband has adapted and adopted western lifestyle. He feels western life is better and rational than his Chinese culture that strange and irrelevant. Different perspective about being woman makes Kwei-Lan cannot win her husband's heart as she thinks and has taught before. Kwei-Lan as a Chinese traditional woman and her husband's lifestyle emerge distinguishes understanding about family between the West and the Chinese tradition.The novel describes how Kwei-Lan's cultural traditional background opposed with her husband's Western lifestyle. In the part II of the novel, Kwei-Lan has to accept that her brother goes to study in America. Later the conflict comes up when her brother has already married with a foreign woman. Even though he has betrothed to one of daughters of Li family since he was child. Their mother is shocked to know such news. The family has to accept that son has been betrayed the family. Her brother chooses to disobey the Chinese tradition of married and his duty as a3son of Royal Family to keep the heir. It is seen as the impact of western culture influence toward her brother.Based on explanation above, the writer is interested and challenged to discuss this novel. Pearl S Buck is able to tell the story with her elegant way. East Wind: West Wind shows the elegant internal conflict of traditional Chinese woman who tries to oppose her ideology of being good woman and wife toward the western discourse that influences her life.In this novel, Pearl S Buck portrays how the Western culture meets the Eastern old tradition and tended to degrade the East. It seems she shows West lifestyle is better and rational than East. Through the main character Kwei-Lan, Buck explains in detail Chinese woman's role in life and compares to the knowledge of Western within her husband. The author also shows the reader how Kwai-Lan's brother finally betrays his old tradition, the Chinese Family tradition, by secretly marriage a foreign woman. Until the end of this novel, Buck confirms the superiority and rationality of Western discourse toward Chinese tradition as East.By using post-colonialism, especially Orientalism of Edward Said, the writer will analyze how these texts construct the Orient through imaginative representations of the main character, Kwei-Lan, in the novel. The writer wants to analyze the differences of two cultures and perceptions based on the the orientalism that found in the novel. It is able to create the assumption about the West as superior and the East is inferior. Orientalism argues those discourses made by Western as a political tool to conquer the reader's minds showing inferiority of the East.Further, Post-colonial criticisms also appropriate as a ―knife‖ to discuss, analyze, and examine a work with its relations and effect of colonialism and the interaction of two different cultures. Therefore, this research is entitled ―Western Domination Implied over Chinese Tradition in Pearl S Buck's East Wind: West Wind (An Orientalism Reading)‖.MetodologyIn this chapter, the writer focuses on the steps that must take to finish this research, that proposed by Sudaryanto (1993). Some steps make this research success. This step relates each other and cannot release form the other steps. There are three steps, first, collecting the data, second, analyzing the data, and third presenting the data.1. Collecting the dataIn collecting data, the writer conducts a library research. Through the library research, the writer collects the data needed,4which can be categorized as primary and secondary data. The primary data itself is; "East Wind; West Wind" by Pearl S Buck, the more specific is sentences and quotations that have relationship with the topic and that have relations with the theory. The secondary data function as tools in analyzing the primary data. It consists of books and other sources from journals and internet sites.The writer conducts the library research about post-colonial criticism. In this step writer finds the definitions and concept of post colonialism, especially the theory of Orientalism by Edward Said. It is helpful to broaden the perspective of writer about the term.2. Analyzing the DataIn analyzing the data writer examines the primary data by the way of close reading and in analyzing specific sentences and quotations that have relationship with the topic and the theory. Based on Edgar Robert, ―to analyze the problems in the literary work, it can be found by digging up through characters in the ways of speech, dialogue and action between one character and other characters‖ (56).Besides, the writer explores some data related about the Post-Colonial criticism, especially Orientalism approach by Edward Said. Writer will identify the sentence related to the topic and the theory supporting to completing the research.3. Presenting the ResultThe last step is presenting the analysis. The writer thus uses descriptive method to present the data. Based on Bogdan and Biklen, qualitative research is descriptive, the data are collected in the form of words, rather than number, and result of analysis is written descriptively (1982:27) as the rule to conducts this research. The data is presented descriptively in this analysis by quoting the sentences of dialogue from the novel that relevant to the analysis.Result and DiscussionIn this chapter, the writer wants to analyze about the data. In analyzing data the writer uses the theory orientalism by Edwar said. The writer analyzes about the The analysis focuses on two goals, there are (1) to portray the different perspective between Western knowledge and Chinese tradition, and (2) to analyze the implication of Western knowledge as domination over Chinese tradition.Orientalism is a branch of Postcolonial theory that developed by Edward Said According to said this theory is about how The West see the world by binary oposition where It seems to explore the overplus of Western and expose the lacking5of Eastern and make it as if those are natural by using discourse. And the discorse is formed and it will effect to human mind who read it. Besides based on discourse the reader consciusness or uncansciousness will judge what that they read it is god or it is bad. Said does not question about the truth or the wrong. He tries to give us deeply understanding of how colonizer or Western discourse constructs the domination of the world toward colonized or Eastern in every way and how it continues until now.The Different Perspective of the Eastern and the Western in the NovelIn this chapter, the writer would discuss the portrait of contradictive perspective between western Knowledge or Occident and Chinese old tradition or orient. Pearl S Back does not frankly describe what the western culture in the novel East Wind: West Wind is. She implicitly explains how Western culture by contrasted it with Chinese culture experienced by the character Kwei-lanThis chapter, the writer cuncludes that there are saveral contradictions of differernt perspective of the western knowledge and the chinese tradition. The writer divided two subchapter, the Eastern and the Western. It consist the complex family relationships and simple family relationships, narrow minded and open minded, superstitious and rational.Family in the eastern in this case family in Chinese is narrated differently with family in western. It is described that Chinese family is a big extended family, complex and has not much freedom because bound of tradition. Different with western family, that consists of nuclear family, father, mother and children and has more freedom because not bound with the old tradition, it is because they explained are more logic and more simple besides they has right and free will to choose and do whatever they want to do.In the novel describe although the Chinese man has been married, they are allowed or naturally believed to take some concubines as they like. It can be seen by following quotation in the novel:―The desire for sons in a household like ours, where my father had three concubines whose sole interest was in the conceiving and bearing of children was too ordinary to contain any mystery.‖ [11-12]Kwei-Lan's father, as stated above, has three concubines in order to pour his desire in woman and to conduct a birth son for his clan. In the Chinese family, it is normal for the husband to marry other woman. Man in Chinese tradition has a duty to give great male offspring to maintain their clan. Further, Buck states:―They had caught my father fancy at first though a6prettiness which faded like flowers plucking in spring, and my father's favor ceased when their brief beauty was gone.‖[19]The husband can marry any woman if his wife cannot give birth and give him a son. Chinese man can whenever he wants to marry woman and leave them when their beauties are gone.In contrast, the portrayal of Western woman is described as dichotomy to Chinese tradition where the family relationship is simpler. Besides the family in the western is nuclear family and the decision is make by own self \. They do not need many procedure to do something. In the novel, it is narrated by Kwei-lan brother to marry his girlfriend, the kwei-lan brother and hiss wife do not need many procedure to get merit. In this case Buck tries ti show that thee western people are better than Eastern peoplebecause western people has more freedom.In addition, the wife or woman in the western culture tends to not accepting become subordinate position in family. It clarifies in the novel:―The trouble in all this may be that the foreigner is not willing to accept a subordinate position. It is not customary in their country to have secondary wives.‖ [160]Western women believe that they have right and capable to follow their own will. There are no such certain rules either as woman or as wife of their family that have to be obeyed.Kwei-Lan's brother who has been taught the wisdom of the Great Master, has to fulfill the first duty as a man to pay careful heed to every desire of his parents. In spite of obeying the custom, he married a foreign woman when he studied in America. Kwei-lan who shocked to hear is alarmed by her husband. It can be seen in the novel that, he said:―You must be prepared…it is better to face the truth. He will probably not obey you mother… Old foundations are breaking – have broken… there must be stronger reasons than in this days‖ [150]As the one who adapts the Western culture, Kwei-Lan's husband precisely knows that her brother will consistently disobey the old and primitive tradition. Kwei-lan's brother breaks the old custom and chooses to live in progressive and democratic ways as his will. Related to this, Hans Bertens states that―The inferiority that Orientalism attributes to the East simultaneously serves to construct the West's superiority. The sensuality, irrationality, primitiveness, and despotism of the East construct the West as rational, democratic, progressive, and so on‖ [Bertens, 2006: 205]The writer examines that the novel describes the primitiveness and despotism of Chinese7old tradition. Western discourse seems to take place and dominates the character Kwei-Lan's brother, even our perspective, to disobey such custom.Secondly, it is also happened to different perspective can also be seen in the mindset or lifestyle contradiction in the novel. in the family, that is to produces son to maintain the clan and descendent. In Chinese custom, Kwei-lan and her husband should remain stay within the ancestral home. For his father, a noble Chinese man should not waste their dignified leisure time and stay still in home. The family has plenty of food and space. It can be seen when Kwei-lan's father in law spoke to her husband;"here is plenty of food and space. You need never waste your body in physical labor. Spend your days in dignified leisure and in study that suits your pleasure. Allow your daughter in law of your honored mother to produce son. Three generations of sons less than one roof is sight pleasing to heaven‖ [43]In Chinese custom, a noble family should only worry to give born the great son in order to maintain the clan and the descendant of family. It is reflected in the important of a son existence. A husband should not be worried about food and money. This is what has been taught by the ancestor for hundred years. In the other side, Kwei-lan's husband, who has been studied in West, has his own perception. It can be seen in the quotation below:I wish to work father, I am trained in scientific professions – the noblest in the western world. As for sons, they are not my desire. I wish to produce the fruit of my brain for my country's good. A mare dog may fill the earth with the fruit of his body‖ [43]The father of Kwei-Lan's husband wants to keep them in the house without worrying about food and money. He wants them to pay attention to deliver his grandson. Rather than focus on producing son, Kwei-lan's husband wants to work and earn money by himself to his family. His custom cannot change the decision he has taken.Thirdly difference is seen based on the story is superstition and custom and Chinese culture which is described so irrational to be believed. In the novel, Kwei-lan's husband is a doctor. One day someone called him to come to the house where a lady tried to kill herself by hanging her neck. She is still alive but unconscious. In order to heal the woman's soul, the priest came and made a ceremony by plugging a piece of cloth to her nose and mouth.―He sent for the priests to beat the gongs to call the woman's soul back, and her8relatives gathered about and placed the poor unconscious girl…into a kneeling position on the floor; then they deliberately filled her nose and mouth with cotton and cloth and bound clothing around her face‖ [76]Kwei-lan firstly agreed to the old tradition, taking back the soul, which has been done for hundred years. In the contrary, Kwei-lan's husband totally disagreed with such custom that has lost so much spirit of human life.―Would you die if I did this long enough? And he seized my hands in one of his and placed his handkerchief roughly over my mouth and nose. I twisted free and tore it away‖ [76-77]The quotation convinces the irrationality of Chinese old custom, and on the contrary also convinces the rationality of Western discourse. The way of Kwei-lan's husband tries to show to Kwei-Lan seems like confirm the opposite of perspective between Kwei-lan, reprented Chinese tradition, over Western discourse of her husband.The writer concluded that those contradictions are the portrayal of different perspective of the Eastern in this case traditional Chinese and the western knowledge.The Western Knowledge as Domination Implied over Chinese Tradition in The NovelThe writer found the orientalism issues which Western is assumed to has much more realistic to be true. This is a discourse, western discourse, which dominates the assumption about Chinese tradition in the novel. The changing perception of the character, even the readers, seem t confirms this discourse.Kwei-Lan's husband seems to confirm Western discourse based on the way he treat Kwei-lan Kwei-Lan also surprises to hear ‗the new ways' her husband meant to her. Her husband has been certainly influenced by Western culture. For twelve years he studied in foreign country. Then, he now tries to convince Kwei-lan as it is best way for their life. Kwei-lan then responds to think that, it can be seen in the following quotation:―I equal to him? But why? Was I not his wife? .was he not my master by law? …what else could I do if I did not marry? And how could I marry except as my parents arranged it? … it was all according to my custom‖ [36-37].In order to construct the superiority of Western culture, the text shall describe the inferiority of others. In this novel, Pearl S Buck draws the domination or superiority of9Western culture by contrasting to Chinese custom. Therefore, Pearl S Buck's novel has been influenced by Western discourse in the perspective of Orientalism. The writer found that the novel conducts unintentionally domination of Western over Chinese tradition.―… I wish to follow the new ways. I wish to regard you in all things as my equal. I shall never force you anything. You are not my possession—my chattel‖ [36]Changing perception about Western people also described in which the character Kwei-lan asked to her husband about what they think about Chinese tradition. In the novel, Kwei-lan's husband told that;―They think our clothes are funny and our faces and our food and all what we do. It does not occur to them that people can look as we do and behave as we do, and be wholly as human as they are… In fact, I believe they come over here thinking to teach us civilization‖ [88-89]Assuming the clothes, faces, food and all what Chinese people do are funny imply the issue of imperialism of Western domination to Chinese people. The text seems to approve and convince that Western culture is more rational and represented universal civilization. Again, our perception about Eastern culture is conducted to change by contrasting the superiority of Western culture.Further, the writers also found the changing perception of characters in the way Kwei-lan become happy to adopt the modern way of life.―But now, selfish woman that I am, I do not care that the tradition is broken, I think only of my son… I thank the gods that I am married to a modern man… he gives me my son for my own…all my life is not enough to repay my gratitude‖ [114]The climax of disobedient of Chinese tradition as the impact of Western discourse is when Kwei-lan's brother in the end chooses to live freely like what he has been experienced in Western country. It can be seen in the end of novel:―…from this day I have no father. I have no clan – I repudiate the name of Yang! Remove my name from the books! I and my wife, we will go forth. In this day we shall be free as the young if other countries are free‖ [264]In Orientalism perspective, the character Kwei-lan's brother clearly emphasize the domination over Eastern Culture, or Chinese tradition. The final disobedient of character against the old custom confirms the primitiveness and10irrational way of life. Kwei-Lan's brother asserts that that Western culture represented the universal civilization. Accepting the domination of Western culture could benefit him from the ‗backward' or ‗superstitious' conditions in which he lived.In the end, the writer concluded that the the main character Kwei-lan is influenced by Western discourse.―We must let all that go, my love, my love! We do not want our son fettered by old, useless things!‖And thinking of these two, my son and his cousin brother I know that my husband is right – always right! [277]The effect of such discourse is a change of Kwei-lan's perspective about the modernism of Western culture and the backward of her Chinese tradition. Through the hand of her husband, Kwei-lan admitted that Western discourse dominate her whole life assuming as the best way of civilization rather than Chinese ancestors. Influence and changing perception also gives impact to disobey the law of old Chinese tradition that for hundred years believed by the ancestors.ConclusionIn the conclusion, the novel East Wind: West Wind written by Pearl S. Buck tells about Kwei-Lan, a noble Chinese woman who had no experience with modern western style before. She has been taught to become a good daughter of the family and to be good wife for her husband. Kwei-lan has been betrothed since she was born to a noble Chinese royal man whom had twelve years abroad studying medical science. Her husband has adapted and adopted western lifestyle. Kwei-Lan as represented Chinese woman and her husband's lifestyle emerge distinguishes understanding about family between the West and the Chinese tradition. Kwei-Lan's cultural traditional background opposed her husband's Western lifestyle. The conflicts come up from the different perception of life between Western Knowledge and Eastern culture (Chinese Tradition). It is seen in binary opposition such as complex family relationshps and simple family relationships, open minded and narow minded, and superstition and rationality.By using Orientalism approach presented by Edward Said, the writer found that the novel East Wind: West Wind constructs the imaginative representations of the Orient (Chinese culture) through the main character Kwei-Lan. The writer found the indication of Western discourse which dominates the Orient, in this case Chinese culture, through negative perception by describing cultural conflicts of the main character. Kwei-lan is influenced by her11husband who taught her about the Western knowledge. She gradually changed her perception about the West. Kwei-lan who applied her ancestors' custom, started to doubt and questioning the truth about Chinese tradition. Orientalism examined the West constructs such discourse through contrasting the right and rational way of life and the backward and irrational custom of Chinese.In the end, through the analysis the writer emphasize that the novel East Wind: West Wind written by Pearl S. Buck implied the Western Domination over Chinese Tradition. Western discourse succeeds to dominate the assumption and about the West as superior and the East is inferior. Orientalism argues those are constructed by Western as a political tool to conquer the reader's minds showing inferiority of the East. This novel construct discourse of Western domination as well as judgment of China's tradition, which are funny, strange, and backward and need help. The discourse of West to dominate the Chinese tradition by degrading them and shows their better and rational way of life finally create the ‗truth' or ‗reality' about West as standard civilization.Acknowledgement Alhamdulillahirobbil'alamin, First of all let me give my highest praise to Allah SWT, The Almighty God, for help, blessing, mercy, loves and guidance to me. Without the help, guidance and mercy this thesis could not have finished, and for opportunities and everything in my life. Then the writer would like to say thank to great human leader Muhammad SAW who guide people from the bad style of life to the good style of life.I wish to express my gratitudes to both my supervisors: Ms. Suci Humairah, S.Pd.,M.A., and Mrs. Dra. Mariati, M.Hum., for their support and guidance in finishing this thesis. The contribution and guidance in my thesis are valuable things which will not be forgotten to me. I also want to say Thanks to Mrs. Femmy Dahlan, S.S.,M.Hum., and Mr. Dr. Elfiondri, S.S.,M.Hum., as my examiners. Thank you so much for the suggestion, correction, advices and time, so that I can finish my thesis. I would like to thank too, to all of the lectures in English Department. Many tanks to guide and teach the writer during studied in English department.Thank you for my mom Syahlidarmiwati and my dad Bukhari. I would like to say thank you to suggestion, sacrifice, sincere love, patience, and always remaind me to pray and work hardly. And thank you to my brother Renza Putra, Rolanda Putra, and Fauzan Azim. Then I want to dedicate this thesis to science and human live.12I also would like to say Thanks to all of my friends, Sing 08, who have helped me in process of writing this thesis, my friend in faculty, My friend in boarding house, For all of my friends who I cannot mention one by one, thank you very much to have been contributing the most beautiful part in my life. Do the best in our life and get the greatest future.BibliographyBartens, Hans. Literary Theory: The Basic. London: Rouledge, 2001Buck, S. Pearl. East Wind: West Wind. New York. Mayor Bell. 2010Childs, Peter. Roger Fowler. The Rouledge Dictionary of Literary Terms. New York: Rouledge, 2006Hithcock, Loise. A Theory for Classics: a Strident Guide. New York: Rouledge, 2008.Lane, Richard J. Fifty Key Literary Theorists. New York: Rouledge, 2006M. A. R. Habib. Modern Literary Criticism and Theory: A History. Cornwell: Blackwell, 2005Malpas, Simon. Paul Wake. The Rouledge Companion to Critical Theory. New York: Rouledge, 2006Tyson, Lois. Critical Theory Today: A User Friendly Guide. New York: Rouledge, 2006Sudaryanto. Metode dan Aneka Teknik Analisis Bahasa: Pengantar Penelitian Wahana Kebudayaan secara Linguistis. Yogyakarta: Duta Wacana University Press, 1993Journal:Lazare S. Rukundwa & Andries G. van Aarde1. The Formation of Postcolonial Theory Research Associate: Department of New Testament Studies. Cornwell. 2007

La tesis doctoral "Participación política de las personas jóvenes desde la perspectiva del patriarcado en España (2000-2011): factores y límites" tiene como fin indagar cómo las juventudes han desarrollado su participación política en el periodo, entendida ésta como convencional y no convencional, teniendo en cuenta qué elementos de tipo socio-demográfico y de participación han influido para que participaran y qué barreras se han encontrado para realizarlas, sobre todo por cuestión de edad y género. Para estudiarlo se ha procedido a establecer tres objetivos específicos: - Objetivo específico 1. Analizar qué factores intervienen en la participación política convencional de mujeres y hombres jóvenes. - Objetivo específico 2. Analizar qué factores intervienen en la participación política no convencional de mujeres y hombres jóvenes. - Objetivo específico 3. Estudiar los límites a la participación política convencional y no convencional de las personas jóvenes por razón de edad (adultocentrismo) y género (dominación masculina). Con el fin de dar respuesta a estas cuestiones se ha procedido a la utilización de varias metodologías analíticas (pluralismo metodológico) para abordar el objeto de estudio, pues se trata de un fenómeno complejo, empleándose varías técnicas con la finalidad de obtener una aproximación a la realidad con gran calidad en la investigación. En efecto, se han llevado a cabo técnicas de análisis propias de metodologías cualitativas como cuantitativas, tal como se refleja a continuación. - En primer lugar, del lado teórico, se ha procedido a una revisión crítica bajo las perspectivas del patriarcado –dominación adulta y masculina- de las teorías de la participación y de los estudios de participación política de las personas jóvenes en España, con el fin de poner de manifiesto los límites existentes. - Del lado empírico, se ha llevado a cabo un análisis del contexto de tipo normativo relativo a espacios internacionales en los que se enmarca España -Universal, Europeo e Iberoamericano- en materia de participación y juventud, estableciendo el marco en el que se encuentra el país. También, en este sentido se ha procedido al análisis legislativo de las Constituciones Españolas (tomando como inicio 1812) y la normativa relativa a la participación política, reflejando el proceso de construcción socio-histórico y dirigido por las élites de las personas jóvenes como sujetos políticos y su institucionalización. Además, se ha comparado los derechos políticos "concedidos" previos a la mayoría de edad con los derechos políticos. - Además, se ha analizado, de forma descriptiva bajo la perspectiva de género y la crítica adultocéntrica, y a partir de fuentes de datos secundarias -estudios convenio CIS-INJUVE, Ministerio del Interior, Congreso de los Diputados e Instituto Nacional de Estadística-, las formas de participación política de las personas jóvenes en relación a la población general. - Para lograr una mayor profundización sobre la participación de los jóvenes se han aplicado técnicas predictivas, a través de regresiones logísticas, que ha permitido establecer qué variables de tipo socio-demográfico –edad, situación de estudia, trabaja o estudia y trabaja y nivel educativo- y de participación – voto, asistencia a mítines, afiliación política, asistencia a manifestaciones, consumo político, firma de documentos- influyen en la participación convencional y no convencional de mujeres y hombres jóvenes entre 2000-2011. - En cuanto a las técnicas cualitativas se ha interpelado al 'actor social' –personas jóvenes que participan en políticas- a través de entrevistas semiestructuradas. Se han analizado qué límites manifiestan para participar, especialmente focalizados en los límites androcéntricos y adultocéntricos. Ello ha permitido abordar de forma global y omnicomprensiva los factores determinantes y los limites existentes a la participación política de las personas jóvenes en España entre los años 2000 y 2011, destacándose los siguientes resultados: - Las teorías y estudios sobre la participación política de las personas jóvenes suelen adolecer de ciertos límites teóricos y pueden ser tachados tanto de androcéntricos como de adultocéntricos,. - La participación convencional de hombres y mujeres jóvenes está influida por haber alcanzado el nivel máximo de estudios, mientras que este fenómeno no ocurre en la participación no convencional. - Los hombres jóvenes participan más de formas convencional que las mujeres, estando en ambos casos influidos por el nivel máximo educativo alcanzado y la asistencia a manifestaciones. En el caso de los hombres, además, por la participación por medio de firma de peticiones. Las mujeres jóvenes declaran más que se han visto influidas por el entorno familiar, mientras que los hombres jóvenes que participan de forma convencional lo relacionan con su ámbito social –amigos y universidad-. - Las mujeres jóvenes participan más de forma no convencional que los hombres. Esta forma de participación está condicionada por variables participativas tanto para hombres, como para mujeres jóvenes, como son votar y asistir a mítines. Además, para las mujeres jóvenes influye también el que estén trabajando, estudiando o estudien y trabajen y, también declaran que consideran que se ha producido influencia familiar. - Con relación a los límites de la participación política de los jóvenes existe cierta tendencia en el ámbito internacional a una consideración más inclusiva y heterogénea de las personas jóvenes, así como a incentivar su participación, pero éstas son declaraciones sin elementos de implementación o reclamación. - La normativa nacional, además, genera límites de participación de tipo adultocéntrico en el caso que las personas jóvenes entren en contacto con personas adultas a la hora de participar –asociaciones-. Además, hay derechos con intereses marcadamente económicos y que benefician a los grupos dominantes –hombres y personas adultas- que reducen la edad de concesión de derechos, como es el uso de armas, mientras que los derechos políticos están supeditados a la mayoría de edad. - Las personas jóvenes que participan identifican que existen límites a su participación por edad. En las personas que llevan a cabo prácticas de participación convencional se detecta que éstas son "utilizadas" por los partidos políticos para transmitir una imagen de juventud, desarrollar la infraestructura de los actos o trabajos de menor incidencia política, limitándoles su acceso, incluso, en los casos de comités de juventud. En los casos de participación no convencional no se detecta tanto el límite a dicha participación, aunque también se declara que sus opiniones y actitudes han sido cuestionadas por razón de edad. - Las mujeres jóvenes, y algunos hombres jóvenes, han declarado que participan tanto en formas convencionales, como no convencionales, y que se dan límites a la hora de participar por cuestión de género. Han declarado que se produce un techo a la hora de ascender dentro de las estructuras de los partidos –participación convencional-, en la apropiación de las palabras de las mujeres por parte de hombres, en las formas de comunicación con ellas, etc. Es de destacar que algunos hombres, tanto en formas convencionales y no convencionales, han considerado que en su entorno "esto no se produce", sin ser prácticamente así en el caso de las mujeres jóvenes. - Además, se ha puesto de manifiesto la necesidad de abordar el fenómeno de la participación de las juventudes teniendo en consideración a los actores sociales y sus heterogeneidades, así como superando los límites adultocenténtricos y androcéntricos. The aim of the doctoral thesis "Political Participation of Young People from the Patriarchal perspective in Spain (2000-2011): Factors and Limits" is to inquire how the young people have developed their political participation during this period, understanding this participation in a conventional as well as in a non-conventional way, and taking into account the sociodemographic and the participation elements that have had an influence in the political participation of young people, as well as the obstacles that they have found when doing so, especially due to age and gender reasons. For the research, there are three specific objectives: - First specific objective: Analyse the factors that take part in the conventional participation of young women and men. - Second specific objective: Analyse the factors that take part in the non-conventional participation of young women and men. - Third specific objective: Study the limits to the political participation of young people in the conventional and non-conventional spheres based on age (adultcentrism) and gender (male domination) reasons. With the objective of answering these questions, we have proceeded to use different analytic methodologies to present the subject matter, as it is a complex phenomenon, and different techniques have been employed in order to obtain a research of great quality in the process of approaching these realities. In fact, analysing techniques typical in qualitative methodologies, as well as quantitative, have been used. - In the first place, from the theory framework, a critical review from the patriarchal perspective –male and adult domination- to the participation theories and the researches of the political participation of young people in Spain has been done to expose the limits they have. - From the empiric research, a legislative analysis of the context has been done, taking into account the international area in which Spain plays a role – Universal, European and Ibero-American spaces- in the participation and youth field. In addition, an analysis of the Spanish legislation has also been made, as the different Constitutions (starting with the one which dates from 1812) and the regulations concerning political participation reflect how the socio-historical construction as political subjects has been influenced by the elites, as well as what has happened with the institutionalisation process. In addition, a comparison between the political rights and those who are given to young people before reaching the age of majority has been carried out. - In addition, the sundry forms of political participation of young people compared to the general population have been also analysed. This analysis has been elaborated from the critic perspective of gender and adultcentrism and from the descriptive perspective with secondary sources of data – researches from CIS-INJUVE, the Home Office, the Chamber of Deputies and the INE. - In order to go deeper into the details about the political participation of young people, predictive techniques have been applied such as logistic regression that allows to set up the different socio-demographic variables –age, studies level and studies and/or labour situation- and participation variables –vote, public meeting assistance, political affiliation, take part in demonstrations, political consumption and signing of documents;-variables that have had an influence in the conventional and non-conventional participation of young people between 2000-2011. - Concerning the qualitative techniques the 'social actor' – young people who participate in politics- has been questioned by means of semi-structured interviews.T he limits that they said that they had to participate have been analysed, especially focusing on the limits represented by androcentricity and adultcentrism. This has allowed us to analyse in a global and all-inclusive way, the decisive factors and the limits that young people have had with regards to the political participation in Spain between 2000-2011. As a result of that there have been the following significant results: - The theories and researches about the political participation of young people lacked some theoretical background and they could be considered to be based on a point of view based on adultcentrism and androcentricity. - The conventional participation of young men and women has been influenced by the fact of having reached the maximum level of their studies (according to their age), while this phenomenon does not happen in the non-conventional participation. - Young men participated more in the conventional way than young women, being in both cases influenced by the maximum level of their studies and the demonstrations´ assistance. In the case of the young male, he has been also influenced by the signing of demanding documents. Young women said that they had been influenced by their family, while young men who participated in the conventional way said that they were more influenced by their social groups –friends and University-. - Young women participated more in the non-conventional way than young men. This way of participation has been determined by participative variables as vote or meeting assistance in both cases. In addition, for young women, the fact of being working, studying or doing both has also an influence. They also consider that family has also influenced them. - With regards to the limits of the political participation of young people there is a certain tendency in the international realm to have a more inclusive and wide cross approach of young people as well as a higher tendency to stimulate their participation but these are declarations which have neither elements of implementation nor of reclamation. - Spanish laws produce some limits derived from adultcentrism to the participation of young people in case they get in contact with adult people –associations- as well. In addition there are some rights with clear economic interests and which benefit dominant groups- men and adult people- where the age required to rejoice those rights is lowered such as the right to carry weapons; whereas political rights are limited to the age of majority. - Young people who participated said that they had some limits to participate because of being young. Young people who participated in the conventional way said that this practices had been "used" by the political parties in order to offer an image of youth, including developing the infrastructure of events or tasks with a lesser political incidence; they even stated that their participation had been limited even in cases of youth committees. Concerning the non-conventional participation the limit to that participation is not so evident although they have also stated that their opinions and attitudes have been questioned due to their age. - Young women, and some young men, said that they participated in conventional and non-conventional ways alike, and that they had found some limits to participating based on gender reasons. They said that there was a glass ceiling to promote inside the political organisations –conventional participation-, the appropriation of the words of young women by men and in the way to address women. It must be mentioned that some young men who participated in both conventional and non-conventional ways said that they had not seen those practices in their environment whereas almost all the women said they had seen those practices. - In addition it has become evident the need to analyse the phenomenon of the participation of young people bearing in mind the social actors as well as their differences, as well as by overcoming the limits based on adultcentrism and androcentricity.